· web viewthe cornwall college group is proud of its teaching and research and it undertakes all...

61
Plymouth University Academic Partnerships CORNWALL COLLEGE (CAMBORNE) Programme Quality Handbook BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Academic Year 2017-2018 1 | Page BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Upload: ngothu

Post on 11-Jun-2018

213 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Plymouth University

Academic Partnerships

CORNWALL COLLEGE (CAMBORNE)

Programme Quality HandbookBSc (Hons) Environmental Resource

Management (Top up)Academic Year 2017-2018

1 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

If you require any part of this Handbook in larger print or an alternative format please contact

HE Operations Tel (01209 616256)

E-mail (cornwallheacornwallacuk)

Please note

All the information in this Handbook is correct at the time of printing

The Cornwall College Group is proud of its teaching and research and it undertakes all reasonable steps to provide educational services in the manner set out in this Handbook and in any documents referred to within it It does not however guarantee the provision of such services Should industrial action or circumstances beyond the control of the College interfere with its ability to

2 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

provide educational services the University undertakes to use all reasonable steps to minimise the resultant disruption to those services

3 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Contents1 Welcome and Introduction tohelliphellip4

2 Programme Team4

3 Personal Tutor5

31 Plymouth Portal6

4 Programme Details7

41 Enhancement Activities7

42 Progression through the programme7

43 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College8

44 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University9

5 Employment Opportunities9

6 Teaching Learning and Assessment9

61 Referencing Guides10

7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback11

8 Student Feedback14

81 Student Representation and Enhancement14

82 Student Perception Surveys14

83 Closing the Feedback Loop15

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)15

85 Complaints16

86 Extenuating Circumstances16

9 Appendix17

91 Programme Specification17

4 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

May we begin by warmly welcoming you to the BSc (Hons) in Environmental Resource Management The College is delighted that you have chosen to continue your studies with us We are sure you are going to have a great time here and will get a great deal from the programme

This Student Handbook is designed specifically for the Degree you are studying the BSc (Hons) in Environmental Resource Management In it you will find information about

Who will be teaching and providing support to you

What you will be studying

How to get the best from your experiences here

Remember that this programme is only one year long so we want you to lsquohit the ground runningrsquo So please take the time to read this handbook especially if you are joining the college from another place of study or work

This programme has been designed to equip you with the skills and knowledge base required to work in your chosen specialism or other graduate opportunities It is also a platform from which you can undertake additional vocational and academic qualifications

This Programme Quality handbook contains important information including

The approved programme specification Module records

Note the information in this handbook should be read in conjunction with the current edition of the College Handbook which contains student support based information on issues such as finance and studying at HE along with the Universityrsquos Student Handbook available here httpswwwplymouthacukyour-universitygovernancestudent-handbook

2 Programme TeamProgramme Leader

Lawrence Moores Project Supervisor

Email lawrencemoorescornwallacuk

Module Leaders

5 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Dr Michael Hunt michaelhuntcornwallacuk Module leader for Research Methods amp Environmental Investigation modules and project supervisor

Dr Angus Jackson angusjacksoncornwallacuk Module leader Honours Project personal tutor amp project supervisor

Yvonne Oates yvonneoatescornwallacuk Lecturer in Geographic information systems project supervisor

John Blackburn Module leader amp Lecturer Wildlife Crime amp Environmental Impact Assessment

Dr Kelly HaynesKellyhaynescornwallacuk Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

Dr Peter McGregor petermcgregorcornwallacuk Research amp Projects Director Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

CORPORATE HE ASSISTANT REGISTRAR Michelle (Mitch) Inglis

What does the Corporate HE Assistant Registrar (CHEAR) do The CHEAR is your point of contact in HE Operations for all administrative paperwork to do with the programme

She can be contacted on Telephone 01209 617759 or Ext 3759 Email mitchingliscornwallacuk

3 Personal TutorYour personal tutor should be the first person at the College that you speak to if you are having any personal difficulties that are affecting your studies These could be academic financial health-related or another type of problem Your personal tutor is there to provide additional academic and personal support concerning issues that may affect your studies Personal Tutors are particularly important for students in their first year helping them to manage the transition from school or the workplace to university-style life Personal tutors also assist with helping you to engage with important aspects of preparation for your career and or progression to further study and profiling your progress through the programme

Your main support for academic issues relating to specific modules will be the lecturer who is teaching that module Your tutor will be the person who if the College is asked will write a personal reference for you during or on completion of your studies

Programme staff will communicate with students in the following ways

Email - staff will communicate with you via your college andor university email In order to maintain professionalism staff will not communicate with you directly using your personal email If you do not wish to regularly check BOTH your College and Plymouth University emails you must ensure that these are forwarded to your personal email address

Text messaging ndash Under exceptional circumstances staff may contact you via text Please ensure that your Programme Manager has your current mobile number

CollegeInstitution intranet virtual learning environment ndash For module level communications staff use the Moodle Site Please make sure that you are enrolled onto all of your modules

6 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

HE Operations Moodle Pages ndash this site houses a vast array of information relevant to your time at the College

Plymouth University Student Portal (see section below) Programme Notice-Board HE bulletins Link to CollegeInstitution campus map or details httpswwwcornwallacuklocation-pagesnewquay-

campushtml Links to disability support teams httpswwwcornwallacukuniversitysupport-during-your-degree

The university personal tutoring policy is available for information and guidance

31 Plymouth Portal

As a Plymouth student you are able to access the Universityrsquos e-resources through the Plymouth portal (the Universityrsquos internal staff and student website)

There is access to over pound2 million of e-resources and e-journals in a variety of different subject ranges which can be used to support your studies An excellent library guide has been developed to help you access these resources off campus and this also links you to subject specific resources This link takes you to the universities library guide homepage httpplymouthlibguidescompartners

In addition the University has created a Student Study File available at wwwstudywithplymouthacuk which signposts you to a wealth of resources including UPSU (Plymouth Student Union) Study Skills Guides and using the portal

You will automatically have a Plymouth University e-mail account accessed through myEdesk E-mail calendar contacts (OWA) structured as follows FirstnameSurnamestudentsplymouthacuk Your password will always be given in this format Dobddmmyyyy eg Dob10071984 You can change your password once into the portal however please make sure it is something memorable as you will need it throughout your studies

There are instructions located on the student study file on how to forward your University emails to your preferred email address to ensure you obtain the necessary Plymouth communications throughout your studies

To change your password at any time - click on the lsquoChange Passwordrsquo on the top right hand side of the homepage

If you have forgotten your passwords please go to httpwwwplymouthacukpassword and you can reset it easily Alternatively you can go to HE Operations who will be able to reset it for you as well

To access the portal type httpstudentplymouthacuk into your browser OR if you want to go in via the extranet type wwwplymouthacuk and then click on Internal Students

Enter the username and password given to you from your programme manager or Learning Resource Staff member

The Student Community on the Portal signposts you to many resources including

E-resources journals databases - click on the myEdesk Library Media amp IT (TIS) University student services and learning resources Link into UPSU the Universityrsquos Student Union Academic information and regulations including the University student handbook How to work safely on the web

7 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

4 Programme Details

41 Enhancement Activities

The course will begin with an induction activity providing us all with an opportunity to get to know each other before the formal teaching starts This usually takes the form of a day trip to the coast Depending upon your choice of modules you will take part in field trips or site visits and may have talk from visiting speakers

An important aspect of this degree is its vocational nature All students are encouraged to seek relevant employment or placement during their studies ndash that is why the actual lsquoteachingrsquo timetable leaves you with some free time during the week But additionally many of the modules have vocational elements such as practical experience visits to and from individuals and organisations in your vocational area and simulations

Rather than separating work related learning into a separate module the college has a policy of embedding work related activities across the programme This means ensuring that there is a range of experiences which relate closely to employment and work such as visits visiting speakers practicalrsquos in simulated situations This ensures that students have a very rich environment in which to develop their skills and observe others working

Students of Cornwall College are encouraged to develop their PDPs in a variety of ways The tutorial system where programme leaders act as personal tutors and see their tutees on a regular basis clearly feeds into the principles of PDP At the end of each module students are encouraged to review what they have learnt and how it might contribute to their employability and their personal development And there is a similar end of term and end of year review conducted by the tutor

42 Progression through the programme

Your Programme Manager has access to University staff and is able to communicate your questions regarding progression to programmes at Plymouth University

Your marks for your overall BSc in Environmental Resource Management will be calculated as follows

10 from Level 4 ndash calculated from the highest achieved 80 credits Where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage

30 from Level 5

60 from Level 6

If you progress onto Level 5 of a programme at Plymouth University then 10 (of the highest achieved 80 credits or where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage) will come from your level 4 marks studied previously 30 of your level 5 aggregate mark will be drawn from the level 5 modules studied at Plymouth University and then 60 from your level 6 aggregate mark at Plymouth University

43 Plymouth University Student Union

8 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

All students registered at the University are automatically a member of UPSU You can register on our website wwwupsucom to get all the latest information about offers activities gigs campaigns and contact information for your current CollegeInstitution Reps and full-time Executive Officers The website is where we run our elections so partner students can get involved too You can vote online to make your choice and help make changes to your Union Please feel free to get involved with all aspects of UPSU life whether that be campaigning for change becoming a course rep coming along for a night out volunteering with our volunteering department playing in one of our sports teams using our advice centre or writing for our student newspaper

The main contacts for the SU are the Vice President Outreach and the Outreach Co-ordinator The role of the Vice President Outreach involves representing Partner CollegeInstitution Students by visiting meeting and communicating with partner collegeInstitution students and representatives as well as attending strategic boards and committees to champion the Student Voice To get in touch with the Vice President Outreach please contact vpoutreachupsucom The Outreach Coordinator is responsible for providing a link between partner collegeInstitution students and UPSU and promoting opportunities for involvement If you would like to get in touch please contact partnershipstudentsupsucom or wwwupsucomoffcampus More information on UPSU is available at httpwwwupsucomsocieties There are many clubs and societies you may wish to join please follow the URL to find out more

44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)CCSU exists to represent your voice at every level in the College and to make sure you have a fantastic time whilst you are a student with us Whether you are studying A-Levels gaining a Foundation Degree or working towards a BTEC National Diploma - you are a member of the Studentsrsquo Union

Every campus has a team of elected student officers who will be working hard all year from organising parties to running campaigns and you have plenty of chances to get involved

Plus here at Cornwall College your voice is louder than ever all classes have an elected representative who gets to feedback straight to the President and the local site teams The Studentsrsquo Union is one of the best things about Cornwall College and you have the power to determine what itrsquos doing There is something for everyone so donrsquot hesitate to join in httpswwwcornwallstudentsorg

45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College

HE Careers and Employability

There is a new HE Careers and Employability section on Moodle accessible via the Learner Resources tab

UCAS Applications for Teacher Training open on 27th October

Encourage your HE students to access HE Careers Advice

Here is a link to the Plymouth University Careers amp Employability site which includes the Events Calendar

httpwwwpluprospectsacukcasaservletcasajobseekereventJSEventServletmode=showEvampevent_id=SUBOPLU-07072015-EVNT-35658ampsource=casajobseekereventJSEventServlet3Fmode3DshowCal26month3DAll26eventType3DO26seriesStr3Dampstack=null3Anull

9 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University

As a Plymouth University student you will also be able to access the Plymouth University Careers and Employability Service which can provide a wealth of guidance and support resources

5 Employment Opportunities Whilst studying this programme you will be given the opportunity to develop further personal and employability related skills through planned module content and also external opportunities A range of teaching approaches are used to specifically enable you to develop and enhance your communication and team working skills Employers and other industry professionals also input into the programme giving you further contacts

6 Teaching Learning and AssessmentIn a full time Foundation Degree all your work in the first year (Stage 1) will be at level 4 The modules in the second year (Stage 2) of a full time course will be at level 5 If you progress to an honours degree this is HE level 6

HE Level 4

Successful work at Level 4 will show sound knowledge of the underlying concepts and principles of the subjects that you have studied and you will have learned how to take different approaches to solving problems You will be able show that you can communicate accurately in written and spoken language appropriate to the work in hand and the audience You will have the demonstrated the qualities needed for employment requiring the exercise of some personal responsibility

You will in addition be able to show that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems and be able to present evaluate and interpret material including numerical data in order to develop lines of argument and make sound judgements in accordance with basic theories and concepts the subjects that you have studied

HE Level 5

Successful work at level 5 will show that you can apply the knowledge understanding and skills that your course has given you more widely so that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in some unpredictable situations You will be able to show the qualities necessary for employment in situations requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making and that you can perform effectively in your chosen field

You will be able to demonstrate knowledge and critical understanding of the well-established principles of the subjects you have studied and of the way in which those principles have developed You will be able to apply your knowledge understanding and skills outside the context in which they were first studied including in an employment context You will also be able to show that you can apply the main methods of enquiry in the subjects studied and evaluate critically the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in the field of study In particular you will be able to show that you have an understanding of the limits of your knowledge and how this can influence your thoughts and decisions Your standard of communication in all the accepted forms related to your course will be good and you will be able to communicate well to a variety of audiences You will be able to undertake further training develop existing skills and acquire new competences so that you can assume significant responsibility within organisations You will be able to show that you have qualities and transferable skills necessary for employment requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making

10 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Your performance in a module will be assessed during the academic year normally through a combination of coursework and end of year examinations You must pass the assessments in order to be credited with that module for your award In addition some modules may have to be passed as pre-requisites for others taken later in your programme

The method of assessment varies between modules and your lecturers will advise you of the method(s) to be used This reflects the need to develop a range of different knowledge understanding and skills During your programme you may experience some or all of the following types of assessment

Coursework essay questions

Coursework group reports Coursework case study problems Group presentations Small group assessed discussions Practicalrsquos Formal examinations In-class tests Online assessments Portfolios Research project

In all cases these are chosen and designed to assess your achievement of the particular learning outcomes for the module You will be given Assessment Criteria which are used to judge the extent of your achievement

Please note that ALL assessment marks and results are provisional until confirmed by the Subject Assessment Panel and verified by the Award Assessment Board If you do well enough ie you average a mark of over 70 over all your modules at the end of your programme then you will qualify for the award of a First Class Degree You should note marks of 70 and over are awarded for outstanding work only

Please reference the Benchmarking Skills Map within the Programme Specification for further details on how the teaching learning and assessments are achieved within each module

61 Referencing Guides

Look at the Learning Resource Centre page on the student portal for the most up to date guide and citethemrightonlinecom

httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationregulationsplagiarism

Academic offences and academic dishonesty including plagiarism are treated very seriously in the University and in the College and the Universityrsquos academic dishonesty process will be invoked A student who is proven to have committed an academic offence may be placing his or her degree in jeopardy It is your responsibility as a student to make sure that you understand what constitutes an academic offence and in particular what plagiarism is and how to avoid it You should note that when you submit coursework assessments using the specified front cover you will be expected to confirm by signature that you have read and understood the University of Plymouthrsquos policy on plagiarism

62 Exam Procedures

11 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

If you require any part of this Handbook in larger print or an alternative format please contact

HE Operations Tel (01209 616256)

E-mail (cornwallheacornwallacuk)

Please note

All the information in this Handbook is correct at the time of printing

The Cornwall College Group is proud of its teaching and research and it undertakes all reasonable steps to provide educational services in the manner set out in this Handbook and in any documents referred to within it It does not however guarantee the provision of such services Should industrial action or circumstances beyond the control of the College interfere with its ability to

2 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

provide educational services the University undertakes to use all reasonable steps to minimise the resultant disruption to those services

3 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Contents1 Welcome and Introduction tohelliphellip4

2 Programme Team4

3 Personal Tutor5

31 Plymouth Portal6

4 Programme Details7

41 Enhancement Activities7

42 Progression through the programme7

43 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College8

44 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University9

5 Employment Opportunities9

6 Teaching Learning and Assessment9

61 Referencing Guides10

7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback11

8 Student Feedback14

81 Student Representation and Enhancement14

82 Student Perception Surveys14

83 Closing the Feedback Loop15

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)15

85 Complaints16

86 Extenuating Circumstances16

9 Appendix17

91 Programme Specification17

4 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

May we begin by warmly welcoming you to the BSc (Hons) in Environmental Resource Management The College is delighted that you have chosen to continue your studies with us We are sure you are going to have a great time here and will get a great deal from the programme

This Student Handbook is designed specifically for the Degree you are studying the BSc (Hons) in Environmental Resource Management In it you will find information about

Who will be teaching and providing support to you

What you will be studying

How to get the best from your experiences here

Remember that this programme is only one year long so we want you to lsquohit the ground runningrsquo So please take the time to read this handbook especially if you are joining the college from another place of study or work

This programme has been designed to equip you with the skills and knowledge base required to work in your chosen specialism or other graduate opportunities It is also a platform from which you can undertake additional vocational and academic qualifications

This Programme Quality handbook contains important information including

The approved programme specification Module records

Note the information in this handbook should be read in conjunction with the current edition of the College Handbook which contains student support based information on issues such as finance and studying at HE along with the Universityrsquos Student Handbook available here httpswwwplymouthacukyour-universitygovernancestudent-handbook

2 Programme TeamProgramme Leader

Lawrence Moores Project Supervisor

Email lawrencemoorescornwallacuk

Module Leaders

5 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Dr Michael Hunt michaelhuntcornwallacuk Module leader for Research Methods amp Environmental Investigation modules and project supervisor

Dr Angus Jackson angusjacksoncornwallacuk Module leader Honours Project personal tutor amp project supervisor

Yvonne Oates yvonneoatescornwallacuk Lecturer in Geographic information systems project supervisor

John Blackburn Module leader amp Lecturer Wildlife Crime amp Environmental Impact Assessment

Dr Kelly HaynesKellyhaynescornwallacuk Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

Dr Peter McGregor petermcgregorcornwallacuk Research amp Projects Director Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

CORPORATE HE ASSISTANT REGISTRAR Michelle (Mitch) Inglis

What does the Corporate HE Assistant Registrar (CHEAR) do The CHEAR is your point of contact in HE Operations for all administrative paperwork to do with the programme

She can be contacted on Telephone 01209 617759 or Ext 3759 Email mitchingliscornwallacuk

3 Personal TutorYour personal tutor should be the first person at the College that you speak to if you are having any personal difficulties that are affecting your studies These could be academic financial health-related or another type of problem Your personal tutor is there to provide additional academic and personal support concerning issues that may affect your studies Personal Tutors are particularly important for students in their first year helping them to manage the transition from school or the workplace to university-style life Personal tutors also assist with helping you to engage with important aspects of preparation for your career and or progression to further study and profiling your progress through the programme

Your main support for academic issues relating to specific modules will be the lecturer who is teaching that module Your tutor will be the person who if the College is asked will write a personal reference for you during or on completion of your studies

Programme staff will communicate with students in the following ways

Email - staff will communicate with you via your college andor university email In order to maintain professionalism staff will not communicate with you directly using your personal email If you do not wish to regularly check BOTH your College and Plymouth University emails you must ensure that these are forwarded to your personal email address

Text messaging ndash Under exceptional circumstances staff may contact you via text Please ensure that your Programme Manager has your current mobile number

CollegeInstitution intranet virtual learning environment ndash For module level communications staff use the Moodle Site Please make sure that you are enrolled onto all of your modules

6 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

HE Operations Moodle Pages ndash this site houses a vast array of information relevant to your time at the College

Plymouth University Student Portal (see section below) Programme Notice-Board HE bulletins Link to CollegeInstitution campus map or details httpswwwcornwallacuklocation-pagesnewquay-

campushtml Links to disability support teams httpswwwcornwallacukuniversitysupport-during-your-degree

The university personal tutoring policy is available for information and guidance

31 Plymouth Portal

As a Plymouth student you are able to access the Universityrsquos e-resources through the Plymouth portal (the Universityrsquos internal staff and student website)

There is access to over pound2 million of e-resources and e-journals in a variety of different subject ranges which can be used to support your studies An excellent library guide has been developed to help you access these resources off campus and this also links you to subject specific resources This link takes you to the universities library guide homepage httpplymouthlibguidescompartners

In addition the University has created a Student Study File available at wwwstudywithplymouthacuk which signposts you to a wealth of resources including UPSU (Plymouth Student Union) Study Skills Guides and using the portal

You will automatically have a Plymouth University e-mail account accessed through myEdesk E-mail calendar contacts (OWA) structured as follows FirstnameSurnamestudentsplymouthacuk Your password will always be given in this format Dobddmmyyyy eg Dob10071984 You can change your password once into the portal however please make sure it is something memorable as you will need it throughout your studies

There are instructions located on the student study file on how to forward your University emails to your preferred email address to ensure you obtain the necessary Plymouth communications throughout your studies

To change your password at any time - click on the lsquoChange Passwordrsquo on the top right hand side of the homepage

If you have forgotten your passwords please go to httpwwwplymouthacukpassword and you can reset it easily Alternatively you can go to HE Operations who will be able to reset it for you as well

To access the portal type httpstudentplymouthacuk into your browser OR if you want to go in via the extranet type wwwplymouthacuk and then click on Internal Students

Enter the username and password given to you from your programme manager or Learning Resource Staff member

The Student Community on the Portal signposts you to many resources including

E-resources journals databases - click on the myEdesk Library Media amp IT (TIS) University student services and learning resources Link into UPSU the Universityrsquos Student Union Academic information and regulations including the University student handbook How to work safely on the web

7 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

4 Programme Details

41 Enhancement Activities

The course will begin with an induction activity providing us all with an opportunity to get to know each other before the formal teaching starts This usually takes the form of a day trip to the coast Depending upon your choice of modules you will take part in field trips or site visits and may have talk from visiting speakers

An important aspect of this degree is its vocational nature All students are encouraged to seek relevant employment or placement during their studies ndash that is why the actual lsquoteachingrsquo timetable leaves you with some free time during the week But additionally many of the modules have vocational elements such as practical experience visits to and from individuals and organisations in your vocational area and simulations

Rather than separating work related learning into a separate module the college has a policy of embedding work related activities across the programme This means ensuring that there is a range of experiences which relate closely to employment and work such as visits visiting speakers practicalrsquos in simulated situations This ensures that students have a very rich environment in which to develop their skills and observe others working

Students of Cornwall College are encouraged to develop their PDPs in a variety of ways The tutorial system where programme leaders act as personal tutors and see their tutees on a regular basis clearly feeds into the principles of PDP At the end of each module students are encouraged to review what they have learnt and how it might contribute to their employability and their personal development And there is a similar end of term and end of year review conducted by the tutor

42 Progression through the programme

Your Programme Manager has access to University staff and is able to communicate your questions regarding progression to programmes at Plymouth University

Your marks for your overall BSc in Environmental Resource Management will be calculated as follows

10 from Level 4 ndash calculated from the highest achieved 80 credits Where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage

30 from Level 5

60 from Level 6

If you progress onto Level 5 of a programme at Plymouth University then 10 (of the highest achieved 80 credits or where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage) will come from your level 4 marks studied previously 30 of your level 5 aggregate mark will be drawn from the level 5 modules studied at Plymouth University and then 60 from your level 6 aggregate mark at Plymouth University

43 Plymouth University Student Union

8 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

All students registered at the University are automatically a member of UPSU You can register on our website wwwupsucom to get all the latest information about offers activities gigs campaigns and contact information for your current CollegeInstitution Reps and full-time Executive Officers The website is where we run our elections so partner students can get involved too You can vote online to make your choice and help make changes to your Union Please feel free to get involved with all aspects of UPSU life whether that be campaigning for change becoming a course rep coming along for a night out volunteering with our volunteering department playing in one of our sports teams using our advice centre or writing for our student newspaper

The main contacts for the SU are the Vice President Outreach and the Outreach Co-ordinator The role of the Vice President Outreach involves representing Partner CollegeInstitution Students by visiting meeting and communicating with partner collegeInstitution students and representatives as well as attending strategic boards and committees to champion the Student Voice To get in touch with the Vice President Outreach please contact vpoutreachupsucom The Outreach Coordinator is responsible for providing a link between partner collegeInstitution students and UPSU and promoting opportunities for involvement If you would like to get in touch please contact partnershipstudentsupsucom or wwwupsucomoffcampus More information on UPSU is available at httpwwwupsucomsocieties There are many clubs and societies you may wish to join please follow the URL to find out more

44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)CCSU exists to represent your voice at every level in the College and to make sure you have a fantastic time whilst you are a student with us Whether you are studying A-Levels gaining a Foundation Degree or working towards a BTEC National Diploma - you are a member of the Studentsrsquo Union

Every campus has a team of elected student officers who will be working hard all year from organising parties to running campaigns and you have plenty of chances to get involved

Plus here at Cornwall College your voice is louder than ever all classes have an elected representative who gets to feedback straight to the President and the local site teams The Studentsrsquo Union is one of the best things about Cornwall College and you have the power to determine what itrsquos doing There is something for everyone so donrsquot hesitate to join in httpswwwcornwallstudentsorg

45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College

HE Careers and Employability

There is a new HE Careers and Employability section on Moodle accessible via the Learner Resources tab

UCAS Applications for Teacher Training open on 27th October

Encourage your HE students to access HE Careers Advice

Here is a link to the Plymouth University Careers amp Employability site which includes the Events Calendar

httpwwwpluprospectsacukcasaservletcasajobseekereventJSEventServletmode=showEvampevent_id=SUBOPLU-07072015-EVNT-35658ampsource=casajobseekereventJSEventServlet3Fmode3DshowCal26month3DAll26eventType3DO26seriesStr3Dampstack=null3Anull

9 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University

As a Plymouth University student you will also be able to access the Plymouth University Careers and Employability Service which can provide a wealth of guidance and support resources

5 Employment Opportunities Whilst studying this programme you will be given the opportunity to develop further personal and employability related skills through planned module content and also external opportunities A range of teaching approaches are used to specifically enable you to develop and enhance your communication and team working skills Employers and other industry professionals also input into the programme giving you further contacts

6 Teaching Learning and AssessmentIn a full time Foundation Degree all your work in the first year (Stage 1) will be at level 4 The modules in the second year (Stage 2) of a full time course will be at level 5 If you progress to an honours degree this is HE level 6

HE Level 4

Successful work at Level 4 will show sound knowledge of the underlying concepts and principles of the subjects that you have studied and you will have learned how to take different approaches to solving problems You will be able show that you can communicate accurately in written and spoken language appropriate to the work in hand and the audience You will have the demonstrated the qualities needed for employment requiring the exercise of some personal responsibility

You will in addition be able to show that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems and be able to present evaluate and interpret material including numerical data in order to develop lines of argument and make sound judgements in accordance with basic theories and concepts the subjects that you have studied

HE Level 5

Successful work at level 5 will show that you can apply the knowledge understanding and skills that your course has given you more widely so that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in some unpredictable situations You will be able to show the qualities necessary for employment in situations requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making and that you can perform effectively in your chosen field

You will be able to demonstrate knowledge and critical understanding of the well-established principles of the subjects you have studied and of the way in which those principles have developed You will be able to apply your knowledge understanding and skills outside the context in which they were first studied including in an employment context You will also be able to show that you can apply the main methods of enquiry in the subjects studied and evaluate critically the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in the field of study In particular you will be able to show that you have an understanding of the limits of your knowledge and how this can influence your thoughts and decisions Your standard of communication in all the accepted forms related to your course will be good and you will be able to communicate well to a variety of audiences You will be able to undertake further training develop existing skills and acquire new competences so that you can assume significant responsibility within organisations You will be able to show that you have qualities and transferable skills necessary for employment requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making

10 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Your performance in a module will be assessed during the academic year normally through a combination of coursework and end of year examinations You must pass the assessments in order to be credited with that module for your award In addition some modules may have to be passed as pre-requisites for others taken later in your programme

The method of assessment varies between modules and your lecturers will advise you of the method(s) to be used This reflects the need to develop a range of different knowledge understanding and skills During your programme you may experience some or all of the following types of assessment

Coursework essay questions

Coursework group reports Coursework case study problems Group presentations Small group assessed discussions Practicalrsquos Formal examinations In-class tests Online assessments Portfolios Research project

In all cases these are chosen and designed to assess your achievement of the particular learning outcomes for the module You will be given Assessment Criteria which are used to judge the extent of your achievement

Please note that ALL assessment marks and results are provisional until confirmed by the Subject Assessment Panel and verified by the Award Assessment Board If you do well enough ie you average a mark of over 70 over all your modules at the end of your programme then you will qualify for the award of a First Class Degree You should note marks of 70 and over are awarded for outstanding work only

Please reference the Benchmarking Skills Map within the Programme Specification for further details on how the teaching learning and assessments are achieved within each module

61 Referencing Guides

Look at the Learning Resource Centre page on the student portal for the most up to date guide and citethemrightonlinecom

httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationregulationsplagiarism

Academic offences and academic dishonesty including plagiarism are treated very seriously in the University and in the College and the Universityrsquos academic dishonesty process will be invoked A student who is proven to have committed an academic offence may be placing his or her degree in jeopardy It is your responsibility as a student to make sure that you understand what constitutes an academic offence and in particular what plagiarism is and how to avoid it You should note that when you submit coursework assessments using the specified front cover you will be expected to confirm by signature that you have read and understood the University of Plymouthrsquos policy on plagiarism

62 Exam Procedures

11 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

provide educational services the University undertakes to use all reasonable steps to minimise the resultant disruption to those services

3 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Contents1 Welcome and Introduction tohelliphellip4

2 Programme Team4

3 Personal Tutor5

31 Plymouth Portal6

4 Programme Details7

41 Enhancement Activities7

42 Progression through the programme7

43 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College8

44 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University9

5 Employment Opportunities9

6 Teaching Learning and Assessment9

61 Referencing Guides10

7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback11

8 Student Feedback14

81 Student Representation and Enhancement14

82 Student Perception Surveys14

83 Closing the Feedback Loop15

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)15

85 Complaints16

86 Extenuating Circumstances16

9 Appendix17

91 Programme Specification17

4 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

May we begin by warmly welcoming you to the BSc (Hons) in Environmental Resource Management The College is delighted that you have chosen to continue your studies with us We are sure you are going to have a great time here and will get a great deal from the programme

This Student Handbook is designed specifically for the Degree you are studying the BSc (Hons) in Environmental Resource Management In it you will find information about

Who will be teaching and providing support to you

What you will be studying

How to get the best from your experiences here

Remember that this programme is only one year long so we want you to lsquohit the ground runningrsquo So please take the time to read this handbook especially if you are joining the college from another place of study or work

This programme has been designed to equip you with the skills and knowledge base required to work in your chosen specialism or other graduate opportunities It is also a platform from which you can undertake additional vocational and academic qualifications

This Programme Quality handbook contains important information including

The approved programme specification Module records

Note the information in this handbook should be read in conjunction with the current edition of the College Handbook which contains student support based information on issues such as finance and studying at HE along with the Universityrsquos Student Handbook available here httpswwwplymouthacukyour-universitygovernancestudent-handbook

2 Programme TeamProgramme Leader

Lawrence Moores Project Supervisor

Email lawrencemoorescornwallacuk

Module Leaders

5 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Dr Michael Hunt michaelhuntcornwallacuk Module leader for Research Methods amp Environmental Investigation modules and project supervisor

Dr Angus Jackson angusjacksoncornwallacuk Module leader Honours Project personal tutor amp project supervisor

Yvonne Oates yvonneoatescornwallacuk Lecturer in Geographic information systems project supervisor

John Blackburn Module leader amp Lecturer Wildlife Crime amp Environmental Impact Assessment

Dr Kelly HaynesKellyhaynescornwallacuk Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

Dr Peter McGregor petermcgregorcornwallacuk Research amp Projects Director Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

CORPORATE HE ASSISTANT REGISTRAR Michelle (Mitch) Inglis

What does the Corporate HE Assistant Registrar (CHEAR) do The CHEAR is your point of contact in HE Operations for all administrative paperwork to do with the programme

She can be contacted on Telephone 01209 617759 or Ext 3759 Email mitchingliscornwallacuk

3 Personal TutorYour personal tutor should be the first person at the College that you speak to if you are having any personal difficulties that are affecting your studies These could be academic financial health-related or another type of problem Your personal tutor is there to provide additional academic and personal support concerning issues that may affect your studies Personal Tutors are particularly important for students in their first year helping them to manage the transition from school or the workplace to university-style life Personal tutors also assist with helping you to engage with important aspects of preparation for your career and or progression to further study and profiling your progress through the programme

Your main support for academic issues relating to specific modules will be the lecturer who is teaching that module Your tutor will be the person who if the College is asked will write a personal reference for you during or on completion of your studies

Programme staff will communicate with students in the following ways

Email - staff will communicate with you via your college andor university email In order to maintain professionalism staff will not communicate with you directly using your personal email If you do not wish to regularly check BOTH your College and Plymouth University emails you must ensure that these are forwarded to your personal email address

Text messaging ndash Under exceptional circumstances staff may contact you via text Please ensure that your Programme Manager has your current mobile number

CollegeInstitution intranet virtual learning environment ndash For module level communications staff use the Moodle Site Please make sure that you are enrolled onto all of your modules

6 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

HE Operations Moodle Pages ndash this site houses a vast array of information relevant to your time at the College

Plymouth University Student Portal (see section below) Programme Notice-Board HE bulletins Link to CollegeInstitution campus map or details httpswwwcornwallacuklocation-pagesnewquay-

campushtml Links to disability support teams httpswwwcornwallacukuniversitysupport-during-your-degree

The university personal tutoring policy is available for information and guidance

31 Plymouth Portal

As a Plymouth student you are able to access the Universityrsquos e-resources through the Plymouth portal (the Universityrsquos internal staff and student website)

There is access to over pound2 million of e-resources and e-journals in a variety of different subject ranges which can be used to support your studies An excellent library guide has been developed to help you access these resources off campus and this also links you to subject specific resources This link takes you to the universities library guide homepage httpplymouthlibguidescompartners

In addition the University has created a Student Study File available at wwwstudywithplymouthacuk which signposts you to a wealth of resources including UPSU (Plymouth Student Union) Study Skills Guides and using the portal

You will automatically have a Plymouth University e-mail account accessed through myEdesk E-mail calendar contacts (OWA) structured as follows FirstnameSurnamestudentsplymouthacuk Your password will always be given in this format Dobddmmyyyy eg Dob10071984 You can change your password once into the portal however please make sure it is something memorable as you will need it throughout your studies

There are instructions located on the student study file on how to forward your University emails to your preferred email address to ensure you obtain the necessary Plymouth communications throughout your studies

To change your password at any time - click on the lsquoChange Passwordrsquo on the top right hand side of the homepage

If you have forgotten your passwords please go to httpwwwplymouthacukpassword and you can reset it easily Alternatively you can go to HE Operations who will be able to reset it for you as well

To access the portal type httpstudentplymouthacuk into your browser OR if you want to go in via the extranet type wwwplymouthacuk and then click on Internal Students

Enter the username and password given to you from your programme manager or Learning Resource Staff member

The Student Community on the Portal signposts you to many resources including

E-resources journals databases - click on the myEdesk Library Media amp IT (TIS) University student services and learning resources Link into UPSU the Universityrsquos Student Union Academic information and regulations including the University student handbook How to work safely on the web

7 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

4 Programme Details

41 Enhancement Activities

The course will begin with an induction activity providing us all with an opportunity to get to know each other before the formal teaching starts This usually takes the form of a day trip to the coast Depending upon your choice of modules you will take part in field trips or site visits and may have talk from visiting speakers

An important aspect of this degree is its vocational nature All students are encouraged to seek relevant employment or placement during their studies ndash that is why the actual lsquoteachingrsquo timetable leaves you with some free time during the week But additionally many of the modules have vocational elements such as practical experience visits to and from individuals and organisations in your vocational area and simulations

Rather than separating work related learning into a separate module the college has a policy of embedding work related activities across the programme This means ensuring that there is a range of experiences which relate closely to employment and work such as visits visiting speakers practicalrsquos in simulated situations This ensures that students have a very rich environment in which to develop their skills and observe others working

Students of Cornwall College are encouraged to develop their PDPs in a variety of ways The tutorial system where programme leaders act as personal tutors and see their tutees on a regular basis clearly feeds into the principles of PDP At the end of each module students are encouraged to review what they have learnt and how it might contribute to their employability and their personal development And there is a similar end of term and end of year review conducted by the tutor

42 Progression through the programme

Your Programme Manager has access to University staff and is able to communicate your questions regarding progression to programmes at Plymouth University

Your marks for your overall BSc in Environmental Resource Management will be calculated as follows

10 from Level 4 ndash calculated from the highest achieved 80 credits Where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage

30 from Level 5

60 from Level 6

If you progress onto Level 5 of a programme at Plymouth University then 10 (of the highest achieved 80 credits or where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage) will come from your level 4 marks studied previously 30 of your level 5 aggregate mark will be drawn from the level 5 modules studied at Plymouth University and then 60 from your level 6 aggregate mark at Plymouth University

43 Plymouth University Student Union

8 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

All students registered at the University are automatically a member of UPSU You can register on our website wwwupsucom to get all the latest information about offers activities gigs campaigns and contact information for your current CollegeInstitution Reps and full-time Executive Officers The website is where we run our elections so partner students can get involved too You can vote online to make your choice and help make changes to your Union Please feel free to get involved with all aspects of UPSU life whether that be campaigning for change becoming a course rep coming along for a night out volunteering with our volunteering department playing in one of our sports teams using our advice centre or writing for our student newspaper

The main contacts for the SU are the Vice President Outreach and the Outreach Co-ordinator The role of the Vice President Outreach involves representing Partner CollegeInstitution Students by visiting meeting and communicating with partner collegeInstitution students and representatives as well as attending strategic boards and committees to champion the Student Voice To get in touch with the Vice President Outreach please contact vpoutreachupsucom The Outreach Coordinator is responsible for providing a link between partner collegeInstitution students and UPSU and promoting opportunities for involvement If you would like to get in touch please contact partnershipstudentsupsucom or wwwupsucomoffcampus More information on UPSU is available at httpwwwupsucomsocieties There are many clubs and societies you may wish to join please follow the URL to find out more

44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)CCSU exists to represent your voice at every level in the College and to make sure you have a fantastic time whilst you are a student with us Whether you are studying A-Levels gaining a Foundation Degree or working towards a BTEC National Diploma - you are a member of the Studentsrsquo Union

Every campus has a team of elected student officers who will be working hard all year from organising parties to running campaigns and you have plenty of chances to get involved

Plus here at Cornwall College your voice is louder than ever all classes have an elected representative who gets to feedback straight to the President and the local site teams The Studentsrsquo Union is one of the best things about Cornwall College and you have the power to determine what itrsquos doing There is something for everyone so donrsquot hesitate to join in httpswwwcornwallstudentsorg

45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College

HE Careers and Employability

There is a new HE Careers and Employability section on Moodle accessible via the Learner Resources tab

UCAS Applications for Teacher Training open on 27th October

Encourage your HE students to access HE Careers Advice

Here is a link to the Plymouth University Careers amp Employability site which includes the Events Calendar

httpwwwpluprospectsacukcasaservletcasajobseekereventJSEventServletmode=showEvampevent_id=SUBOPLU-07072015-EVNT-35658ampsource=casajobseekereventJSEventServlet3Fmode3DshowCal26month3DAll26eventType3DO26seriesStr3Dampstack=null3Anull

9 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University

As a Plymouth University student you will also be able to access the Plymouth University Careers and Employability Service which can provide a wealth of guidance and support resources

5 Employment Opportunities Whilst studying this programme you will be given the opportunity to develop further personal and employability related skills through planned module content and also external opportunities A range of teaching approaches are used to specifically enable you to develop and enhance your communication and team working skills Employers and other industry professionals also input into the programme giving you further contacts

6 Teaching Learning and AssessmentIn a full time Foundation Degree all your work in the first year (Stage 1) will be at level 4 The modules in the second year (Stage 2) of a full time course will be at level 5 If you progress to an honours degree this is HE level 6

HE Level 4

Successful work at Level 4 will show sound knowledge of the underlying concepts and principles of the subjects that you have studied and you will have learned how to take different approaches to solving problems You will be able show that you can communicate accurately in written and spoken language appropriate to the work in hand and the audience You will have the demonstrated the qualities needed for employment requiring the exercise of some personal responsibility

You will in addition be able to show that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems and be able to present evaluate and interpret material including numerical data in order to develop lines of argument and make sound judgements in accordance with basic theories and concepts the subjects that you have studied

HE Level 5

Successful work at level 5 will show that you can apply the knowledge understanding and skills that your course has given you more widely so that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in some unpredictable situations You will be able to show the qualities necessary for employment in situations requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making and that you can perform effectively in your chosen field

You will be able to demonstrate knowledge and critical understanding of the well-established principles of the subjects you have studied and of the way in which those principles have developed You will be able to apply your knowledge understanding and skills outside the context in which they were first studied including in an employment context You will also be able to show that you can apply the main methods of enquiry in the subjects studied and evaluate critically the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in the field of study In particular you will be able to show that you have an understanding of the limits of your knowledge and how this can influence your thoughts and decisions Your standard of communication in all the accepted forms related to your course will be good and you will be able to communicate well to a variety of audiences You will be able to undertake further training develop existing skills and acquire new competences so that you can assume significant responsibility within organisations You will be able to show that you have qualities and transferable skills necessary for employment requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making

10 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Your performance in a module will be assessed during the academic year normally through a combination of coursework and end of year examinations You must pass the assessments in order to be credited with that module for your award In addition some modules may have to be passed as pre-requisites for others taken later in your programme

The method of assessment varies between modules and your lecturers will advise you of the method(s) to be used This reflects the need to develop a range of different knowledge understanding and skills During your programme you may experience some or all of the following types of assessment

Coursework essay questions

Coursework group reports Coursework case study problems Group presentations Small group assessed discussions Practicalrsquos Formal examinations In-class tests Online assessments Portfolios Research project

In all cases these are chosen and designed to assess your achievement of the particular learning outcomes for the module You will be given Assessment Criteria which are used to judge the extent of your achievement

Please note that ALL assessment marks and results are provisional until confirmed by the Subject Assessment Panel and verified by the Award Assessment Board If you do well enough ie you average a mark of over 70 over all your modules at the end of your programme then you will qualify for the award of a First Class Degree You should note marks of 70 and over are awarded for outstanding work only

Please reference the Benchmarking Skills Map within the Programme Specification for further details on how the teaching learning and assessments are achieved within each module

61 Referencing Guides

Look at the Learning Resource Centre page on the student portal for the most up to date guide and citethemrightonlinecom

httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationregulationsplagiarism

Academic offences and academic dishonesty including plagiarism are treated very seriously in the University and in the College and the Universityrsquos academic dishonesty process will be invoked A student who is proven to have committed an academic offence may be placing his or her degree in jeopardy It is your responsibility as a student to make sure that you understand what constitutes an academic offence and in particular what plagiarism is and how to avoid it You should note that when you submit coursework assessments using the specified front cover you will be expected to confirm by signature that you have read and understood the University of Plymouthrsquos policy on plagiarism

62 Exam Procedures

11 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

Contents1 Welcome and Introduction tohelliphellip4

2 Programme Team4

3 Personal Tutor5

31 Plymouth Portal6

4 Programme Details7

41 Enhancement Activities7

42 Progression through the programme7

43 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College8

44 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University9

5 Employment Opportunities9

6 Teaching Learning and Assessment9

61 Referencing Guides10

7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback11

8 Student Feedback14

81 Student Representation and Enhancement14

82 Student Perception Surveys14

83 Closing the Feedback Loop15

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)15

85 Complaints16

86 Extenuating Circumstances16

9 Appendix17

91 Programme Specification17

4 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

May we begin by warmly welcoming you to the BSc (Hons) in Environmental Resource Management The College is delighted that you have chosen to continue your studies with us We are sure you are going to have a great time here and will get a great deal from the programme

This Student Handbook is designed specifically for the Degree you are studying the BSc (Hons) in Environmental Resource Management In it you will find information about

Who will be teaching and providing support to you

What you will be studying

How to get the best from your experiences here

Remember that this programme is only one year long so we want you to lsquohit the ground runningrsquo So please take the time to read this handbook especially if you are joining the college from another place of study or work

This programme has been designed to equip you with the skills and knowledge base required to work in your chosen specialism or other graduate opportunities It is also a platform from which you can undertake additional vocational and academic qualifications

This Programme Quality handbook contains important information including

The approved programme specification Module records

Note the information in this handbook should be read in conjunction with the current edition of the College Handbook which contains student support based information on issues such as finance and studying at HE along with the Universityrsquos Student Handbook available here httpswwwplymouthacukyour-universitygovernancestudent-handbook

2 Programme TeamProgramme Leader

Lawrence Moores Project Supervisor

Email lawrencemoorescornwallacuk

Module Leaders

5 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Dr Michael Hunt michaelhuntcornwallacuk Module leader for Research Methods amp Environmental Investigation modules and project supervisor

Dr Angus Jackson angusjacksoncornwallacuk Module leader Honours Project personal tutor amp project supervisor

Yvonne Oates yvonneoatescornwallacuk Lecturer in Geographic information systems project supervisor

John Blackburn Module leader amp Lecturer Wildlife Crime amp Environmental Impact Assessment

Dr Kelly HaynesKellyhaynescornwallacuk Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

Dr Peter McGregor petermcgregorcornwallacuk Research amp Projects Director Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

CORPORATE HE ASSISTANT REGISTRAR Michelle (Mitch) Inglis

What does the Corporate HE Assistant Registrar (CHEAR) do The CHEAR is your point of contact in HE Operations for all administrative paperwork to do with the programme

She can be contacted on Telephone 01209 617759 or Ext 3759 Email mitchingliscornwallacuk

3 Personal TutorYour personal tutor should be the first person at the College that you speak to if you are having any personal difficulties that are affecting your studies These could be academic financial health-related or another type of problem Your personal tutor is there to provide additional academic and personal support concerning issues that may affect your studies Personal Tutors are particularly important for students in their first year helping them to manage the transition from school or the workplace to university-style life Personal tutors also assist with helping you to engage with important aspects of preparation for your career and or progression to further study and profiling your progress through the programme

Your main support for academic issues relating to specific modules will be the lecturer who is teaching that module Your tutor will be the person who if the College is asked will write a personal reference for you during or on completion of your studies

Programme staff will communicate with students in the following ways

Email - staff will communicate with you via your college andor university email In order to maintain professionalism staff will not communicate with you directly using your personal email If you do not wish to regularly check BOTH your College and Plymouth University emails you must ensure that these are forwarded to your personal email address

Text messaging ndash Under exceptional circumstances staff may contact you via text Please ensure that your Programme Manager has your current mobile number

CollegeInstitution intranet virtual learning environment ndash For module level communications staff use the Moodle Site Please make sure that you are enrolled onto all of your modules

6 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

HE Operations Moodle Pages ndash this site houses a vast array of information relevant to your time at the College

Plymouth University Student Portal (see section below) Programme Notice-Board HE bulletins Link to CollegeInstitution campus map or details httpswwwcornwallacuklocation-pagesnewquay-

campushtml Links to disability support teams httpswwwcornwallacukuniversitysupport-during-your-degree

The university personal tutoring policy is available for information and guidance

31 Plymouth Portal

As a Plymouth student you are able to access the Universityrsquos e-resources through the Plymouth portal (the Universityrsquos internal staff and student website)

There is access to over pound2 million of e-resources and e-journals in a variety of different subject ranges which can be used to support your studies An excellent library guide has been developed to help you access these resources off campus and this also links you to subject specific resources This link takes you to the universities library guide homepage httpplymouthlibguidescompartners

In addition the University has created a Student Study File available at wwwstudywithplymouthacuk which signposts you to a wealth of resources including UPSU (Plymouth Student Union) Study Skills Guides and using the portal

You will automatically have a Plymouth University e-mail account accessed through myEdesk E-mail calendar contacts (OWA) structured as follows FirstnameSurnamestudentsplymouthacuk Your password will always be given in this format Dobddmmyyyy eg Dob10071984 You can change your password once into the portal however please make sure it is something memorable as you will need it throughout your studies

There are instructions located on the student study file on how to forward your University emails to your preferred email address to ensure you obtain the necessary Plymouth communications throughout your studies

To change your password at any time - click on the lsquoChange Passwordrsquo on the top right hand side of the homepage

If you have forgotten your passwords please go to httpwwwplymouthacukpassword and you can reset it easily Alternatively you can go to HE Operations who will be able to reset it for you as well

To access the portal type httpstudentplymouthacuk into your browser OR if you want to go in via the extranet type wwwplymouthacuk and then click on Internal Students

Enter the username and password given to you from your programme manager or Learning Resource Staff member

The Student Community on the Portal signposts you to many resources including

E-resources journals databases - click on the myEdesk Library Media amp IT (TIS) University student services and learning resources Link into UPSU the Universityrsquos Student Union Academic information and regulations including the University student handbook How to work safely on the web

7 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

4 Programme Details

41 Enhancement Activities

The course will begin with an induction activity providing us all with an opportunity to get to know each other before the formal teaching starts This usually takes the form of a day trip to the coast Depending upon your choice of modules you will take part in field trips or site visits and may have talk from visiting speakers

An important aspect of this degree is its vocational nature All students are encouraged to seek relevant employment or placement during their studies ndash that is why the actual lsquoteachingrsquo timetable leaves you with some free time during the week But additionally many of the modules have vocational elements such as practical experience visits to and from individuals and organisations in your vocational area and simulations

Rather than separating work related learning into a separate module the college has a policy of embedding work related activities across the programme This means ensuring that there is a range of experiences which relate closely to employment and work such as visits visiting speakers practicalrsquos in simulated situations This ensures that students have a very rich environment in which to develop their skills and observe others working

Students of Cornwall College are encouraged to develop their PDPs in a variety of ways The tutorial system where programme leaders act as personal tutors and see their tutees on a regular basis clearly feeds into the principles of PDP At the end of each module students are encouraged to review what they have learnt and how it might contribute to their employability and their personal development And there is a similar end of term and end of year review conducted by the tutor

42 Progression through the programme

Your Programme Manager has access to University staff and is able to communicate your questions regarding progression to programmes at Plymouth University

Your marks for your overall BSc in Environmental Resource Management will be calculated as follows

10 from Level 4 ndash calculated from the highest achieved 80 credits Where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage

30 from Level 5

60 from Level 6

If you progress onto Level 5 of a programme at Plymouth University then 10 (of the highest achieved 80 credits or where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage) will come from your level 4 marks studied previously 30 of your level 5 aggregate mark will be drawn from the level 5 modules studied at Plymouth University and then 60 from your level 6 aggregate mark at Plymouth University

43 Plymouth University Student Union

8 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

All students registered at the University are automatically a member of UPSU You can register on our website wwwupsucom to get all the latest information about offers activities gigs campaigns and contact information for your current CollegeInstitution Reps and full-time Executive Officers The website is where we run our elections so partner students can get involved too You can vote online to make your choice and help make changes to your Union Please feel free to get involved with all aspects of UPSU life whether that be campaigning for change becoming a course rep coming along for a night out volunteering with our volunteering department playing in one of our sports teams using our advice centre or writing for our student newspaper

The main contacts for the SU are the Vice President Outreach and the Outreach Co-ordinator The role of the Vice President Outreach involves representing Partner CollegeInstitution Students by visiting meeting and communicating with partner collegeInstitution students and representatives as well as attending strategic boards and committees to champion the Student Voice To get in touch with the Vice President Outreach please contact vpoutreachupsucom The Outreach Coordinator is responsible for providing a link between partner collegeInstitution students and UPSU and promoting opportunities for involvement If you would like to get in touch please contact partnershipstudentsupsucom or wwwupsucomoffcampus More information on UPSU is available at httpwwwupsucomsocieties There are many clubs and societies you may wish to join please follow the URL to find out more

44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)CCSU exists to represent your voice at every level in the College and to make sure you have a fantastic time whilst you are a student with us Whether you are studying A-Levels gaining a Foundation Degree or working towards a BTEC National Diploma - you are a member of the Studentsrsquo Union

Every campus has a team of elected student officers who will be working hard all year from organising parties to running campaigns and you have plenty of chances to get involved

Plus here at Cornwall College your voice is louder than ever all classes have an elected representative who gets to feedback straight to the President and the local site teams The Studentsrsquo Union is one of the best things about Cornwall College and you have the power to determine what itrsquos doing There is something for everyone so donrsquot hesitate to join in httpswwwcornwallstudentsorg

45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College

HE Careers and Employability

There is a new HE Careers and Employability section on Moodle accessible via the Learner Resources tab

UCAS Applications for Teacher Training open on 27th October

Encourage your HE students to access HE Careers Advice

Here is a link to the Plymouth University Careers amp Employability site which includes the Events Calendar

httpwwwpluprospectsacukcasaservletcasajobseekereventJSEventServletmode=showEvampevent_id=SUBOPLU-07072015-EVNT-35658ampsource=casajobseekereventJSEventServlet3Fmode3DshowCal26month3DAll26eventType3DO26seriesStr3Dampstack=null3Anull

9 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University

As a Plymouth University student you will also be able to access the Plymouth University Careers and Employability Service which can provide a wealth of guidance and support resources

5 Employment Opportunities Whilst studying this programme you will be given the opportunity to develop further personal and employability related skills through planned module content and also external opportunities A range of teaching approaches are used to specifically enable you to develop and enhance your communication and team working skills Employers and other industry professionals also input into the programme giving you further contacts

6 Teaching Learning and AssessmentIn a full time Foundation Degree all your work in the first year (Stage 1) will be at level 4 The modules in the second year (Stage 2) of a full time course will be at level 5 If you progress to an honours degree this is HE level 6

HE Level 4

Successful work at Level 4 will show sound knowledge of the underlying concepts and principles of the subjects that you have studied and you will have learned how to take different approaches to solving problems You will be able show that you can communicate accurately in written and spoken language appropriate to the work in hand and the audience You will have the demonstrated the qualities needed for employment requiring the exercise of some personal responsibility

You will in addition be able to show that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems and be able to present evaluate and interpret material including numerical data in order to develop lines of argument and make sound judgements in accordance with basic theories and concepts the subjects that you have studied

HE Level 5

Successful work at level 5 will show that you can apply the knowledge understanding and skills that your course has given you more widely so that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in some unpredictable situations You will be able to show the qualities necessary for employment in situations requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making and that you can perform effectively in your chosen field

You will be able to demonstrate knowledge and critical understanding of the well-established principles of the subjects you have studied and of the way in which those principles have developed You will be able to apply your knowledge understanding and skills outside the context in which they were first studied including in an employment context You will also be able to show that you can apply the main methods of enquiry in the subjects studied and evaluate critically the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in the field of study In particular you will be able to show that you have an understanding of the limits of your knowledge and how this can influence your thoughts and decisions Your standard of communication in all the accepted forms related to your course will be good and you will be able to communicate well to a variety of audiences You will be able to undertake further training develop existing skills and acquire new competences so that you can assume significant responsibility within organisations You will be able to show that you have qualities and transferable skills necessary for employment requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making

10 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Your performance in a module will be assessed during the academic year normally through a combination of coursework and end of year examinations You must pass the assessments in order to be credited with that module for your award In addition some modules may have to be passed as pre-requisites for others taken later in your programme

The method of assessment varies between modules and your lecturers will advise you of the method(s) to be used This reflects the need to develop a range of different knowledge understanding and skills During your programme you may experience some or all of the following types of assessment

Coursework essay questions

Coursework group reports Coursework case study problems Group presentations Small group assessed discussions Practicalrsquos Formal examinations In-class tests Online assessments Portfolios Research project

In all cases these are chosen and designed to assess your achievement of the particular learning outcomes for the module You will be given Assessment Criteria which are used to judge the extent of your achievement

Please note that ALL assessment marks and results are provisional until confirmed by the Subject Assessment Panel and verified by the Award Assessment Board If you do well enough ie you average a mark of over 70 over all your modules at the end of your programme then you will qualify for the award of a First Class Degree You should note marks of 70 and over are awarded for outstanding work only

Please reference the Benchmarking Skills Map within the Programme Specification for further details on how the teaching learning and assessments are achieved within each module

61 Referencing Guides

Look at the Learning Resource Centre page on the student portal for the most up to date guide and citethemrightonlinecom

httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationregulationsplagiarism

Academic offences and academic dishonesty including plagiarism are treated very seriously in the University and in the College and the Universityrsquos academic dishonesty process will be invoked A student who is proven to have committed an academic offence may be placing his or her degree in jeopardy It is your responsibility as a student to make sure that you understand what constitutes an academic offence and in particular what plagiarism is and how to avoid it You should note that when you submit coursework assessments using the specified front cover you will be expected to confirm by signature that you have read and understood the University of Plymouthrsquos policy on plagiarism

62 Exam Procedures

11 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

May we begin by warmly welcoming you to the BSc (Hons) in Environmental Resource Management The College is delighted that you have chosen to continue your studies with us We are sure you are going to have a great time here and will get a great deal from the programme

This Student Handbook is designed specifically for the Degree you are studying the BSc (Hons) in Environmental Resource Management In it you will find information about

Who will be teaching and providing support to you

What you will be studying

How to get the best from your experiences here

Remember that this programme is only one year long so we want you to lsquohit the ground runningrsquo So please take the time to read this handbook especially if you are joining the college from another place of study or work

This programme has been designed to equip you with the skills and knowledge base required to work in your chosen specialism or other graduate opportunities It is also a platform from which you can undertake additional vocational and academic qualifications

This Programme Quality handbook contains important information including

The approved programme specification Module records

Note the information in this handbook should be read in conjunction with the current edition of the College Handbook which contains student support based information on issues such as finance and studying at HE along with the Universityrsquos Student Handbook available here httpswwwplymouthacukyour-universitygovernancestudent-handbook

2 Programme TeamProgramme Leader

Lawrence Moores Project Supervisor

Email lawrencemoorescornwallacuk

Module Leaders

5 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Dr Michael Hunt michaelhuntcornwallacuk Module leader for Research Methods amp Environmental Investigation modules and project supervisor

Dr Angus Jackson angusjacksoncornwallacuk Module leader Honours Project personal tutor amp project supervisor

Yvonne Oates yvonneoatescornwallacuk Lecturer in Geographic information systems project supervisor

John Blackburn Module leader amp Lecturer Wildlife Crime amp Environmental Impact Assessment

Dr Kelly HaynesKellyhaynescornwallacuk Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

Dr Peter McGregor petermcgregorcornwallacuk Research amp Projects Director Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

CORPORATE HE ASSISTANT REGISTRAR Michelle (Mitch) Inglis

What does the Corporate HE Assistant Registrar (CHEAR) do The CHEAR is your point of contact in HE Operations for all administrative paperwork to do with the programme

She can be contacted on Telephone 01209 617759 or Ext 3759 Email mitchingliscornwallacuk

3 Personal TutorYour personal tutor should be the first person at the College that you speak to if you are having any personal difficulties that are affecting your studies These could be academic financial health-related or another type of problem Your personal tutor is there to provide additional academic and personal support concerning issues that may affect your studies Personal Tutors are particularly important for students in their first year helping them to manage the transition from school or the workplace to university-style life Personal tutors also assist with helping you to engage with important aspects of preparation for your career and or progression to further study and profiling your progress through the programme

Your main support for academic issues relating to specific modules will be the lecturer who is teaching that module Your tutor will be the person who if the College is asked will write a personal reference for you during or on completion of your studies

Programme staff will communicate with students in the following ways

Email - staff will communicate with you via your college andor university email In order to maintain professionalism staff will not communicate with you directly using your personal email If you do not wish to regularly check BOTH your College and Plymouth University emails you must ensure that these are forwarded to your personal email address

Text messaging ndash Under exceptional circumstances staff may contact you via text Please ensure that your Programme Manager has your current mobile number

CollegeInstitution intranet virtual learning environment ndash For module level communications staff use the Moodle Site Please make sure that you are enrolled onto all of your modules

6 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

HE Operations Moodle Pages ndash this site houses a vast array of information relevant to your time at the College

Plymouth University Student Portal (see section below) Programme Notice-Board HE bulletins Link to CollegeInstitution campus map or details httpswwwcornwallacuklocation-pagesnewquay-

campushtml Links to disability support teams httpswwwcornwallacukuniversitysupport-during-your-degree

The university personal tutoring policy is available for information and guidance

31 Plymouth Portal

As a Plymouth student you are able to access the Universityrsquos e-resources through the Plymouth portal (the Universityrsquos internal staff and student website)

There is access to over pound2 million of e-resources and e-journals in a variety of different subject ranges which can be used to support your studies An excellent library guide has been developed to help you access these resources off campus and this also links you to subject specific resources This link takes you to the universities library guide homepage httpplymouthlibguidescompartners

In addition the University has created a Student Study File available at wwwstudywithplymouthacuk which signposts you to a wealth of resources including UPSU (Plymouth Student Union) Study Skills Guides and using the portal

You will automatically have a Plymouth University e-mail account accessed through myEdesk E-mail calendar contacts (OWA) structured as follows FirstnameSurnamestudentsplymouthacuk Your password will always be given in this format Dobddmmyyyy eg Dob10071984 You can change your password once into the portal however please make sure it is something memorable as you will need it throughout your studies

There are instructions located on the student study file on how to forward your University emails to your preferred email address to ensure you obtain the necessary Plymouth communications throughout your studies

To change your password at any time - click on the lsquoChange Passwordrsquo on the top right hand side of the homepage

If you have forgotten your passwords please go to httpwwwplymouthacukpassword and you can reset it easily Alternatively you can go to HE Operations who will be able to reset it for you as well

To access the portal type httpstudentplymouthacuk into your browser OR if you want to go in via the extranet type wwwplymouthacuk and then click on Internal Students

Enter the username and password given to you from your programme manager or Learning Resource Staff member

The Student Community on the Portal signposts you to many resources including

E-resources journals databases - click on the myEdesk Library Media amp IT (TIS) University student services and learning resources Link into UPSU the Universityrsquos Student Union Academic information and regulations including the University student handbook How to work safely on the web

7 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

4 Programme Details

41 Enhancement Activities

The course will begin with an induction activity providing us all with an opportunity to get to know each other before the formal teaching starts This usually takes the form of a day trip to the coast Depending upon your choice of modules you will take part in field trips or site visits and may have talk from visiting speakers

An important aspect of this degree is its vocational nature All students are encouraged to seek relevant employment or placement during their studies ndash that is why the actual lsquoteachingrsquo timetable leaves you with some free time during the week But additionally many of the modules have vocational elements such as practical experience visits to and from individuals and organisations in your vocational area and simulations

Rather than separating work related learning into a separate module the college has a policy of embedding work related activities across the programme This means ensuring that there is a range of experiences which relate closely to employment and work such as visits visiting speakers practicalrsquos in simulated situations This ensures that students have a very rich environment in which to develop their skills and observe others working

Students of Cornwall College are encouraged to develop their PDPs in a variety of ways The tutorial system where programme leaders act as personal tutors and see their tutees on a regular basis clearly feeds into the principles of PDP At the end of each module students are encouraged to review what they have learnt and how it might contribute to their employability and their personal development And there is a similar end of term and end of year review conducted by the tutor

42 Progression through the programme

Your Programme Manager has access to University staff and is able to communicate your questions regarding progression to programmes at Plymouth University

Your marks for your overall BSc in Environmental Resource Management will be calculated as follows

10 from Level 4 ndash calculated from the highest achieved 80 credits Where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage

30 from Level 5

60 from Level 6

If you progress onto Level 5 of a programme at Plymouth University then 10 (of the highest achieved 80 credits or where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage) will come from your level 4 marks studied previously 30 of your level 5 aggregate mark will be drawn from the level 5 modules studied at Plymouth University and then 60 from your level 6 aggregate mark at Plymouth University

43 Plymouth University Student Union

8 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

All students registered at the University are automatically a member of UPSU You can register on our website wwwupsucom to get all the latest information about offers activities gigs campaigns and contact information for your current CollegeInstitution Reps and full-time Executive Officers The website is where we run our elections so partner students can get involved too You can vote online to make your choice and help make changes to your Union Please feel free to get involved with all aspects of UPSU life whether that be campaigning for change becoming a course rep coming along for a night out volunteering with our volunteering department playing in one of our sports teams using our advice centre or writing for our student newspaper

The main contacts for the SU are the Vice President Outreach and the Outreach Co-ordinator The role of the Vice President Outreach involves representing Partner CollegeInstitution Students by visiting meeting and communicating with partner collegeInstitution students and representatives as well as attending strategic boards and committees to champion the Student Voice To get in touch with the Vice President Outreach please contact vpoutreachupsucom The Outreach Coordinator is responsible for providing a link between partner collegeInstitution students and UPSU and promoting opportunities for involvement If you would like to get in touch please contact partnershipstudentsupsucom or wwwupsucomoffcampus More information on UPSU is available at httpwwwupsucomsocieties There are many clubs and societies you may wish to join please follow the URL to find out more

44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)CCSU exists to represent your voice at every level in the College and to make sure you have a fantastic time whilst you are a student with us Whether you are studying A-Levels gaining a Foundation Degree or working towards a BTEC National Diploma - you are a member of the Studentsrsquo Union

Every campus has a team of elected student officers who will be working hard all year from organising parties to running campaigns and you have plenty of chances to get involved

Plus here at Cornwall College your voice is louder than ever all classes have an elected representative who gets to feedback straight to the President and the local site teams The Studentsrsquo Union is one of the best things about Cornwall College and you have the power to determine what itrsquos doing There is something for everyone so donrsquot hesitate to join in httpswwwcornwallstudentsorg

45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College

HE Careers and Employability

There is a new HE Careers and Employability section on Moodle accessible via the Learner Resources tab

UCAS Applications for Teacher Training open on 27th October

Encourage your HE students to access HE Careers Advice

Here is a link to the Plymouth University Careers amp Employability site which includes the Events Calendar

httpwwwpluprospectsacukcasaservletcasajobseekereventJSEventServletmode=showEvampevent_id=SUBOPLU-07072015-EVNT-35658ampsource=casajobseekereventJSEventServlet3Fmode3DshowCal26month3DAll26eventType3DO26seriesStr3Dampstack=null3Anull

9 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University

As a Plymouth University student you will also be able to access the Plymouth University Careers and Employability Service which can provide a wealth of guidance and support resources

5 Employment Opportunities Whilst studying this programme you will be given the opportunity to develop further personal and employability related skills through planned module content and also external opportunities A range of teaching approaches are used to specifically enable you to develop and enhance your communication and team working skills Employers and other industry professionals also input into the programme giving you further contacts

6 Teaching Learning and AssessmentIn a full time Foundation Degree all your work in the first year (Stage 1) will be at level 4 The modules in the second year (Stage 2) of a full time course will be at level 5 If you progress to an honours degree this is HE level 6

HE Level 4

Successful work at Level 4 will show sound knowledge of the underlying concepts and principles of the subjects that you have studied and you will have learned how to take different approaches to solving problems You will be able show that you can communicate accurately in written and spoken language appropriate to the work in hand and the audience You will have the demonstrated the qualities needed for employment requiring the exercise of some personal responsibility

You will in addition be able to show that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems and be able to present evaluate and interpret material including numerical data in order to develop lines of argument and make sound judgements in accordance with basic theories and concepts the subjects that you have studied

HE Level 5

Successful work at level 5 will show that you can apply the knowledge understanding and skills that your course has given you more widely so that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in some unpredictable situations You will be able to show the qualities necessary for employment in situations requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making and that you can perform effectively in your chosen field

You will be able to demonstrate knowledge and critical understanding of the well-established principles of the subjects you have studied and of the way in which those principles have developed You will be able to apply your knowledge understanding and skills outside the context in which they were first studied including in an employment context You will also be able to show that you can apply the main methods of enquiry in the subjects studied and evaluate critically the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in the field of study In particular you will be able to show that you have an understanding of the limits of your knowledge and how this can influence your thoughts and decisions Your standard of communication in all the accepted forms related to your course will be good and you will be able to communicate well to a variety of audiences You will be able to undertake further training develop existing skills and acquire new competences so that you can assume significant responsibility within organisations You will be able to show that you have qualities and transferable skills necessary for employment requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making

10 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Your performance in a module will be assessed during the academic year normally through a combination of coursework and end of year examinations You must pass the assessments in order to be credited with that module for your award In addition some modules may have to be passed as pre-requisites for others taken later in your programme

The method of assessment varies between modules and your lecturers will advise you of the method(s) to be used This reflects the need to develop a range of different knowledge understanding and skills During your programme you may experience some or all of the following types of assessment

Coursework essay questions

Coursework group reports Coursework case study problems Group presentations Small group assessed discussions Practicalrsquos Formal examinations In-class tests Online assessments Portfolios Research project

In all cases these are chosen and designed to assess your achievement of the particular learning outcomes for the module You will be given Assessment Criteria which are used to judge the extent of your achievement

Please note that ALL assessment marks and results are provisional until confirmed by the Subject Assessment Panel and verified by the Award Assessment Board If you do well enough ie you average a mark of over 70 over all your modules at the end of your programme then you will qualify for the award of a First Class Degree You should note marks of 70 and over are awarded for outstanding work only

Please reference the Benchmarking Skills Map within the Programme Specification for further details on how the teaching learning and assessments are achieved within each module

61 Referencing Guides

Look at the Learning Resource Centre page on the student portal for the most up to date guide and citethemrightonlinecom

httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationregulationsplagiarism

Academic offences and academic dishonesty including plagiarism are treated very seriously in the University and in the College and the Universityrsquos academic dishonesty process will be invoked A student who is proven to have committed an academic offence may be placing his or her degree in jeopardy It is your responsibility as a student to make sure that you understand what constitutes an academic offence and in particular what plagiarism is and how to avoid it You should note that when you submit coursework assessments using the specified front cover you will be expected to confirm by signature that you have read and understood the University of Plymouthrsquos policy on plagiarism

62 Exam Procedures

11 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

Dr Michael Hunt michaelhuntcornwallacuk Module leader for Research Methods amp Environmental Investigation modules and project supervisor

Dr Angus Jackson angusjacksoncornwallacuk Module leader Honours Project personal tutor amp project supervisor

Yvonne Oates yvonneoatescornwallacuk Lecturer in Geographic information systems project supervisor

John Blackburn Module leader amp Lecturer Wildlife Crime amp Environmental Impact Assessment

Dr Kelly HaynesKellyhaynescornwallacuk Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

Dr Peter McGregor petermcgregorcornwallacuk Research amp Projects Director Lecturer Honours Project amp project supervisor

CORPORATE HE ASSISTANT REGISTRAR Michelle (Mitch) Inglis

What does the Corporate HE Assistant Registrar (CHEAR) do The CHEAR is your point of contact in HE Operations for all administrative paperwork to do with the programme

She can be contacted on Telephone 01209 617759 or Ext 3759 Email mitchingliscornwallacuk

3 Personal TutorYour personal tutor should be the first person at the College that you speak to if you are having any personal difficulties that are affecting your studies These could be academic financial health-related or another type of problem Your personal tutor is there to provide additional academic and personal support concerning issues that may affect your studies Personal Tutors are particularly important for students in their first year helping them to manage the transition from school or the workplace to university-style life Personal tutors also assist with helping you to engage with important aspects of preparation for your career and or progression to further study and profiling your progress through the programme

Your main support for academic issues relating to specific modules will be the lecturer who is teaching that module Your tutor will be the person who if the College is asked will write a personal reference for you during or on completion of your studies

Programme staff will communicate with students in the following ways

Email - staff will communicate with you via your college andor university email In order to maintain professionalism staff will not communicate with you directly using your personal email If you do not wish to regularly check BOTH your College and Plymouth University emails you must ensure that these are forwarded to your personal email address

Text messaging ndash Under exceptional circumstances staff may contact you via text Please ensure that your Programme Manager has your current mobile number

CollegeInstitution intranet virtual learning environment ndash For module level communications staff use the Moodle Site Please make sure that you are enrolled onto all of your modules

6 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

HE Operations Moodle Pages ndash this site houses a vast array of information relevant to your time at the College

Plymouth University Student Portal (see section below) Programme Notice-Board HE bulletins Link to CollegeInstitution campus map or details httpswwwcornwallacuklocation-pagesnewquay-

campushtml Links to disability support teams httpswwwcornwallacukuniversitysupport-during-your-degree

The university personal tutoring policy is available for information and guidance

31 Plymouth Portal

As a Plymouth student you are able to access the Universityrsquos e-resources through the Plymouth portal (the Universityrsquos internal staff and student website)

There is access to over pound2 million of e-resources and e-journals in a variety of different subject ranges which can be used to support your studies An excellent library guide has been developed to help you access these resources off campus and this also links you to subject specific resources This link takes you to the universities library guide homepage httpplymouthlibguidescompartners

In addition the University has created a Student Study File available at wwwstudywithplymouthacuk which signposts you to a wealth of resources including UPSU (Plymouth Student Union) Study Skills Guides and using the portal

You will automatically have a Plymouth University e-mail account accessed through myEdesk E-mail calendar contacts (OWA) structured as follows FirstnameSurnamestudentsplymouthacuk Your password will always be given in this format Dobddmmyyyy eg Dob10071984 You can change your password once into the portal however please make sure it is something memorable as you will need it throughout your studies

There are instructions located on the student study file on how to forward your University emails to your preferred email address to ensure you obtain the necessary Plymouth communications throughout your studies

To change your password at any time - click on the lsquoChange Passwordrsquo on the top right hand side of the homepage

If you have forgotten your passwords please go to httpwwwplymouthacukpassword and you can reset it easily Alternatively you can go to HE Operations who will be able to reset it for you as well

To access the portal type httpstudentplymouthacuk into your browser OR if you want to go in via the extranet type wwwplymouthacuk and then click on Internal Students

Enter the username and password given to you from your programme manager or Learning Resource Staff member

The Student Community on the Portal signposts you to many resources including

E-resources journals databases - click on the myEdesk Library Media amp IT (TIS) University student services and learning resources Link into UPSU the Universityrsquos Student Union Academic information and regulations including the University student handbook How to work safely on the web

7 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

4 Programme Details

41 Enhancement Activities

The course will begin with an induction activity providing us all with an opportunity to get to know each other before the formal teaching starts This usually takes the form of a day trip to the coast Depending upon your choice of modules you will take part in field trips or site visits and may have talk from visiting speakers

An important aspect of this degree is its vocational nature All students are encouraged to seek relevant employment or placement during their studies ndash that is why the actual lsquoteachingrsquo timetable leaves you with some free time during the week But additionally many of the modules have vocational elements such as practical experience visits to and from individuals and organisations in your vocational area and simulations

Rather than separating work related learning into a separate module the college has a policy of embedding work related activities across the programme This means ensuring that there is a range of experiences which relate closely to employment and work such as visits visiting speakers practicalrsquos in simulated situations This ensures that students have a very rich environment in which to develop their skills and observe others working

Students of Cornwall College are encouraged to develop their PDPs in a variety of ways The tutorial system where programme leaders act as personal tutors and see their tutees on a regular basis clearly feeds into the principles of PDP At the end of each module students are encouraged to review what they have learnt and how it might contribute to their employability and their personal development And there is a similar end of term and end of year review conducted by the tutor

42 Progression through the programme

Your Programme Manager has access to University staff and is able to communicate your questions regarding progression to programmes at Plymouth University

Your marks for your overall BSc in Environmental Resource Management will be calculated as follows

10 from Level 4 ndash calculated from the highest achieved 80 credits Where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage

30 from Level 5

60 from Level 6

If you progress onto Level 5 of a programme at Plymouth University then 10 (of the highest achieved 80 credits or where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage) will come from your level 4 marks studied previously 30 of your level 5 aggregate mark will be drawn from the level 5 modules studied at Plymouth University and then 60 from your level 6 aggregate mark at Plymouth University

43 Plymouth University Student Union

8 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

All students registered at the University are automatically a member of UPSU You can register on our website wwwupsucom to get all the latest information about offers activities gigs campaigns and contact information for your current CollegeInstitution Reps and full-time Executive Officers The website is where we run our elections so partner students can get involved too You can vote online to make your choice and help make changes to your Union Please feel free to get involved with all aspects of UPSU life whether that be campaigning for change becoming a course rep coming along for a night out volunteering with our volunteering department playing in one of our sports teams using our advice centre or writing for our student newspaper

The main contacts for the SU are the Vice President Outreach and the Outreach Co-ordinator The role of the Vice President Outreach involves representing Partner CollegeInstitution Students by visiting meeting and communicating with partner collegeInstitution students and representatives as well as attending strategic boards and committees to champion the Student Voice To get in touch with the Vice President Outreach please contact vpoutreachupsucom The Outreach Coordinator is responsible for providing a link between partner collegeInstitution students and UPSU and promoting opportunities for involvement If you would like to get in touch please contact partnershipstudentsupsucom or wwwupsucomoffcampus More information on UPSU is available at httpwwwupsucomsocieties There are many clubs and societies you may wish to join please follow the URL to find out more

44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)CCSU exists to represent your voice at every level in the College and to make sure you have a fantastic time whilst you are a student with us Whether you are studying A-Levels gaining a Foundation Degree or working towards a BTEC National Diploma - you are a member of the Studentsrsquo Union

Every campus has a team of elected student officers who will be working hard all year from organising parties to running campaigns and you have plenty of chances to get involved

Plus here at Cornwall College your voice is louder than ever all classes have an elected representative who gets to feedback straight to the President and the local site teams The Studentsrsquo Union is one of the best things about Cornwall College and you have the power to determine what itrsquos doing There is something for everyone so donrsquot hesitate to join in httpswwwcornwallstudentsorg

45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College

HE Careers and Employability

There is a new HE Careers and Employability section on Moodle accessible via the Learner Resources tab

UCAS Applications for Teacher Training open on 27th October

Encourage your HE students to access HE Careers Advice

Here is a link to the Plymouth University Careers amp Employability site which includes the Events Calendar

httpwwwpluprospectsacukcasaservletcasajobseekereventJSEventServletmode=showEvampevent_id=SUBOPLU-07072015-EVNT-35658ampsource=casajobseekereventJSEventServlet3Fmode3DshowCal26month3DAll26eventType3DO26seriesStr3Dampstack=null3Anull

9 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University

As a Plymouth University student you will also be able to access the Plymouth University Careers and Employability Service which can provide a wealth of guidance and support resources

5 Employment Opportunities Whilst studying this programme you will be given the opportunity to develop further personal and employability related skills through planned module content and also external opportunities A range of teaching approaches are used to specifically enable you to develop and enhance your communication and team working skills Employers and other industry professionals also input into the programme giving you further contacts

6 Teaching Learning and AssessmentIn a full time Foundation Degree all your work in the first year (Stage 1) will be at level 4 The modules in the second year (Stage 2) of a full time course will be at level 5 If you progress to an honours degree this is HE level 6

HE Level 4

Successful work at Level 4 will show sound knowledge of the underlying concepts and principles of the subjects that you have studied and you will have learned how to take different approaches to solving problems You will be able show that you can communicate accurately in written and spoken language appropriate to the work in hand and the audience You will have the demonstrated the qualities needed for employment requiring the exercise of some personal responsibility

You will in addition be able to show that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems and be able to present evaluate and interpret material including numerical data in order to develop lines of argument and make sound judgements in accordance with basic theories and concepts the subjects that you have studied

HE Level 5

Successful work at level 5 will show that you can apply the knowledge understanding and skills that your course has given you more widely so that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in some unpredictable situations You will be able to show the qualities necessary for employment in situations requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making and that you can perform effectively in your chosen field

You will be able to demonstrate knowledge and critical understanding of the well-established principles of the subjects you have studied and of the way in which those principles have developed You will be able to apply your knowledge understanding and skills outside the context in which they were first studied including in an employment context You will also be able to show that you can apply the main methods of enquiry in the subjects studied and evaluate critically the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in the field of study In particular you will be able to show that you have an understanding of the limits of your knowledge and how this can influence your thoughts and decisions Your standard of communication in all the accepted forms related to your course will be good and you will be able to communicate well to a variety of audiences You will be able to undertake further training develop existing skills and acquire new competences so that you can assume significant responsibility within organisations You will be able to show that you have qualities and transferable skills necessary for employment requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making

10 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Your performance in a module will be assessed during the academic year normally through a combination of coursework and end of year examinations You must pass the assessments in order to be credited with that module for your award In addition some modules may have to be passed as pre-requisites for others taken later in your programme

The method of assessment varies between modules and your lecturers will advise you of the method(s) to be used This reflects the need to develop a range of different knowledge understanding and skills During your programme you may experience some or all of the following types of assessment

Coursework essay questions

Coursework group reports Coursework case study problems Group presentations Small group assessed discussions Practicalrsquos Formal examinations In-class tests Online assessments Portfolios Research project

In all cases these are chosen and designed to assess your achievement of the particular learning outcomes for the module You will be given Assessment Criteria which are used to judge the extent of your achievement

Please note that ALL assessment marks and results are provisional until confirmed by the Subject Assessment Panel and verified by the Award Assessment Board If you do well enough ie you average a mark of over 70 over all your modules at the end of your programme then you will qualify for the award of a First Class Degree You should note marks of 70 and over are awarded for outstanding work only

Please reference the Benchmarking Skills Map within the Programme Specification for further details on how the teaching learning and assessments are achieved within each module

61 Referencing Guides

Look at the Learning Resource Centre page on the student portal for the most up to date guide and citethemrightonlinecom

httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationregulationsplagiarism

Academic offences and academic dishonesty including plagiarism are treated very seriously in the University and in the College and the Universityrsquos academic dishonesty process will be invoked A student who is proven to have committed an academic offence may be placing his or her degree in jeopardy It is your responsibility as a student to make sure that you understand what constitutes an academic offence and in particular what plagiarism is and how to avoid it You should note that when you submit coursework assessments using the specified front cover you will be expected to confirm by signature that you have read and understood the University of Plymouthrsquos policy on plagiarism

62 Exam Procedures

11 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

HE Operations Moodle Pages ndash this site houses a vast array of information relevant to your time at the College

Plymouth University Student Portal (see section below) Programme Notice-Board HE bulletins Link to CollegeInstitution campus map or details httpswwwcornwallacuklocation-pagesnewquay-

campushtml Links to disability support teams httpswwwcornwallacukuniversitysupport-during-your-degree

The university personal tutoring policy is available for information and guidance

31 Plymouth Portal

As a Plymouth student you are able to access the Universityrsquos e-resources through the Plymouth portal (the Universityrsquos internal staff and student website)

There is access to over pound2 million of e-resources and e-journals in a variety of different subject ranges which can be used to support your studies An excellent library guide has been developed to help you access these resources off campus and this also links you to subject specific resources This link takes you to the universities library guide homepage httpplymouthlibguidescompartners

In addition the University has created a Student Study File available at wwwstudywithplymouthacuk which signposts you to a wealth of resources including UPSU (Plymouth Student Union) Study Skills Guides and using the portal

You will automatically have a Plymouth University e-mail account accessed through myEdesk E-mail calendar contacts (OWA) structured as follows FirstnameSurnamestudentsplymouthacuk Your password will always be given in this format Dobddmmyyyy eg Dob10071984 You can change your password once into the portal however please make sure it is something memorable as you will need it throughout your studies

There are instructions located on the student study file on how to forward your University emails to your preferred email address to ensure you obtain the necessary Plymouth communications throughout your studies

To change your password at any time - click on the lsquoChange Passwordrsquo on the top right hand side of the homepage

If you have forgotten your passwords please go to httpwwwplymouthacukpassword and you can reset it easily Alternatively you can go to HE Operations who will be able to reset it for you as well

To access the portal type httpstudentplymouthacuk into your browser OR if you want to go in via the extranet type wwwplymouthacuk and then click on Internal Students

Enter the username and password given to you from your programme manager or Learning Resource Staff member

The Student Community on the Portal signposts you to many resources including

E-resources journals databases - click on the myEdesk Library Media amp IT (TIS) University student services and learning resources Link into UPSU the Universityrsquos Student Union Academic information and regulations including the University student handbook How to work safely on the web

7 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

4 Programme Details

41 Enhancement Activities

The course will begin with an induction activity providing us all with an opportunity to get to know each other before the formal teaching starts This usually takes the form of a day trip to the coast Depending upon your choice of modules you will take part in field trips or site visits and may have talk from visiting speakers

An important aspect of this degree is its vocational nature All students are encouraged to seek relevant employment or placement during their studies ndash that is why the actual lsquoteachingrsquo timetable leaves you with some free time during the week But additionally many of the modules have vocational elements such as practical experience visits to and from individuals and organisations in your vocational area and simulations

Rather than separating work related learning into a separate module the college has a policy of embedding work related activities across the programme This means ensuring that there is a range of experiences which relate closely to employment and work such as visits visiting speakers practicalrsquos in simulated situations This ensures that students have a very rich environment in which to develop their skills and observe others working

Students of Cornwall College are encouraged to develop their PDPs in a variety of ways The tutorial system where programme leaders act as personal tutors and see their tutees on a regular basis clearly feeds into the principles of PDP At the end of each module students are encouraged to review what they have learnt and how it might contribute to their employability and their personal development And there is a similar end of term and end of year review conducted by the tutor

42 Progression through the programme

Your Programme Manager has access to University staff and is able to communicate your questions regarding progression to programmes at Plymouth University

Your marks for your overall BSc in Environmental Resource Management will be calculated as follows

10 from Level 4 ndash calculated from the highest achieved 80 credits Where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage

30 from Level 5

60 from Level 6

If you progress onto Level 5 of a programme at Plymouth University then 10 (of the highest achieved 80 credits or where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage) will come from your level 4 marks studied previously 30 of your level 5 aggregate mark will be drawn from the level 5 modules studied at Plymouth University and then 60 from your level 6 aggregate mark at Plymouth University

43 Plymouth University Student Union

8 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

All students registered at the University are automatically a member of UPSU You can register on our website wwwupsucom to get all the latest information about offers activities gigs campaigns and contact information for your current CollegeInstitution Reps and full-time Executive Officers The website is where we run our elections so partner students can get involved too You can vote online to make your choice and help make changes to your Union Please feel free to get involved with all aspects of UPSU life whether that be campaigning for change becoming a course rep coming along for a night out volunteering with our volunteering department playing in one of our sports teams using our advice centre or writing for our student newspaper

The main contacts for the SU are the Vice President Outreach and the Outreach Co-ordinator The role of the Vice President Outreach involves representing Partner CollegeInstitution Students by visiting meeting and communicating with partner collegeInstitution students and representatives as well as attending strategic boards and committees to champion the Student Voice To get in touch with the Vice President Outreach please contact vpoutreachupsucom The Outreach Coordinator is responsible for providing a link between partner collegeInstitution students and UPSU and promoting opportunities for involvement If you would like to get in touch please contact partnershipstudentsupsucom or wwwupsucomoffcampus More information on UPSU is available at httpwwwupsucomsocieties There are many clubs and societies you may wish to join please follow the URL to find out more

44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)CCSU exists to represent your voice at every level in the College and to make sure you have a fantastic time whilst you are a student with us Whether you are studying A-Levels gaining a Foundation Degree or working towards a BTEC National Diploma - you are a member of the Studentsrsquo Union

Every campus has a team of elected student officers who will be working hard all year from organising parties to running campaigns and you have plenty of chances to get involved

Plus here at Cornwall College your voice is louder than ever all classes have an elected representative who gets to feedback straight to the President and the local site teams The Studentsrsquo Union is one of the best things about Cornwall College and you have the power to determine what itrsquos doing There is something for everyone so donrsquot hesitate to join in httpswwwcornwallstudentsorg

45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College

HE Careers and Employability

There is a new HE Careers and Employability section on Moodle accessible via the Learner Resources tab

UCAS Applications for Teacher Training open on 27th October

Encourage your HE students to access HE Careers Advice

Here is a link to the Plymouth University Careers amp Employability site which includes the Events Calendar

httpwwwpluprospectsacukcasaservletcasajobseekereventJSEventServletmode=showEvampevent_id=SUBOPLU-07072015-EVNT-35658ampsource=casajobseekereventJSEventServlet3Fmode3DshowCal26month3DAll26eventType3DO26seriesStr3Dampstack=null3Anull

9 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University

As a Plymouth University student you will also be able to access the Plymouth University Careers and Employability Service which can provide a wealth of guidance and support resources

5 Employment Opportunities Whilst studying this programme you will be given the opportunity to develop further personal and employability related skills through planned module content and also external opportunities A range of teaching approaches are used to specifically enable you to develop and enhance your communication and team working skills Employers and other industry professionals also input into the programme giving you further contacts

6 Teaching Learning and AssessmentIn a full time Foundation Degree all your work in the first year (Stage 1) will be at level 4 The modules in the second year (Stage 2) of a full time course will be at level 5 If you progress to an honours degree this is HE level 6

HE Level 4

Successful work at Level 4 will show sound knowledge of the underlying concepts and principles of the subjects that you have studied and you will have learned how to take different approaches to solving problems You will be able show that you can communicate accurately in written and spoken language appropriate to the work in hand and the audience You will have the demonstrated the qualities needed for employment requiring the exercise of some personal responsibility

You will in addition be able to show that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems and be able to present evaluate and interpret material including numerical data in order to develop lines of argument and make sound judgements in accordance with basic theories and concepts the subjects that you have studied

HE Level 5

Successful work at level 5 will show that you can apply the knowledge understanding and skills that your course has given you more widely so that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in some unpredictable situations You will be able to show the qualities necessary for employment in situations requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making and that you can perform effectively in your chosen field

You will be able to demonstrate knowledge and critical understanding of the well-established principles of the subjects you have studied and of the way in which those principles have developed You will be able to apply your knowledge understanding and skills outside the context in which they were first studied including in an employment context You will also be able to show that you can apply the main methods of enquiry in the subjects studied and evaluate critically the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in the field of study In particular you will be able to show that you have an understanding of the limits of your knowledge and how this can influence your thoughts and decisions Your standard of communication in all the accepted forms related to your course will be good and you will be able to communicate well to a variety of audiences You will be able to undertake further training develop existing skills and acquire new competences so that you can assume significant responsibility within organisations You will be able to show that you have qualities and transferable skills necessary for employment requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making

10 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Your performance in a module will be assessed during the academic year normally through a combination of coursework and end of year examinations You must pass the assessments in order to be credited with that module for your award In addition some modules may have to be passed as pre-requisites for others taken later in your programme

The method of assessment varies between modules and your lecturers will advise you of the method(s) to be used This reflects the need to develop a range of different knowledge understanding and skills During your programme you may experience some or all of the following types of assessment

Coursework essay questions

Coursework group reports Coursework case study problems Group presentations Small group assessed discussions Practicalrsquos Formal examinations In-class tests Online assessments Portfolios Research project

In all cases these are chosen and designed to assess your achievement of the particular learning outcomes for the module You will be given Assessment Criteria which are used to judge the extent of your achievement

Please note that ALL assessment marks and results are provisional until confirmed by the Subject Assessment Panel and verified by the Award Assessment Board If you do well enough ie you average a mark of over 70 over all your modules at the end of your programme then you will qualify for the award of a First Class Degree You should note marks of 70 and over are awarded for outstanding work only

Please reference the Benchmarking Skills Map within the Programme Specification for further details on how the teaching learning and assessments are achieved within each module

61 Referencing Guides

Look at the Learning Resource Centre page on the student portal for the most up to date guide and citethemrightonlinecom

httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationregulationsplagiarism

Academic offences and academic dishonesty including plagiarism are treated very seriously in the University and in the College and the Universityrsquos academic dishonesty process will be invoked A student who is proven to have committed an academic offence may be placing his or her degree in jeopardy It is your responsibility as a student to make sure that you understand what constitutes an academic offence and in particular what plagiarism is and how to avoid it You should note that when you submit coursework assessments using the specified front cover you will be expected to confirm by signature that you have read and understood the University of Plymouthrsquos policy on plagiarism

62 Exam Procedures

11 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

4 Programme Details

41 Enhancement Activities

The course will begin with an induction activity providing us all with an opportunity to get to know each other before the formal teaching starts This usually takes the form of a day trip to the coast Depending upon your choice of modules you will take part in field trips or site visits and may have talk from visiting speakers

An important aspect of this degree is its vocational nature All students are encouraged to seek relevant employment or placement during their studies ndash that is why the actual lsquoteachingrsquo timetable leaves you with some free time during the week But additionally many of the modules have vocational elements such as practical experience visits to and from individuals and organisations in your vocational area and simulations

Rather than separating work related learning into a separate module the college has a policy of embedding work related activities across the programme This means ensuring that there is a range of experiences which relate closely to employment and work such as visits visiting speakers practicalrsquos in simulated situations This ensures that students have a very rich environment in which to develop their skills and observe others working

Students of Cornwall College are encouraged to develop their PDPs in a variety of ways The tutorial system where programme leaders act as personal tutors and see their tutees on a regular basis clearly feeds into the principles of PDP At the end of each module students are encouraged to review what they have learnt and how it might contribute to their employability and their personal development And there is a similar end of term and end of year review conducted by the tutor

42 Progression through the programme

Your Programme Manager has access to University staff and is able to communicate your questions regarding progression to programmes at Plymouth University

Your marks for your overall BSc in Environmental Resource Management will be calculated as follows

10 from Level 4 ndash calculated from the highest achieved 80 credits Where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage

30 from Level 5

60 from Level 6

If you progress onto Level 5 of a programme at Plymouth University then 10 (of the highest achieved 80 credits or where modules are arranged in such a way that the 80 credits of lsquohighest module marksrsquo cannot be identified unequivocally the average for the best 70 credits and 90 credits will be calculated and the student given the best advantage) will come from your level 4 marks studied previously 30 of your level 5 aggregate mark will be drawn from the level 5 modules studied at Plymouth University and then 60 from your level 6 aggregate mark at Plymouth University

43 Plymouth University Student Union

8 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

All students registered at the University are automatically a member of UPSU You can register on our website wwwupsucom to get all the latest information about offers activities gigs campaigns and contact information for your current CollegeInstitution Reps and full-time Executive Officers The website is where we run our elections so partner students can get involved too You can vote online to make your choice and help make changes to your Union Please feel free to get involved with all aspects of UPSU life whether that be campaigning for change becoming a course rep coming along for a night out volunteering with our volunteering department playing in one of our sports teams using our advice centre or writing for our student newspaper

The main contacts for the SU are the Vice President Outreach and the Outreach Co-ordinator The role of the Vice President Outreach involves representing Partner CollegeInstitution Students by visiting meeting and communicating with partner collegeInstitution students and representatives as well as attending strategic boards and committees to champion the Student Voice To get in touch with the Vice President Outreach please contact vpoutreachupsucom The Outreach Coordinator is responsible for providing a link between partner collegeInstitution students and UPSU and promoting opportunities for involvement If you would like to get in touch please contact partnershipstudentsupsucom or wwwupsucomoffcampus More information on UPSU is available at httpwwwupsucomsocieties There are many clubs and societies you may wish to join please follow the URL to find out more

44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)CCSU exists to represent your voice at every level in the College and to make sure you have a fantastic time whilst you are a student with us Whether you are studying A-Levels gaining a Foundation Degree or working towards a BTEC National Diploma - you are a member of the Studentsrsquo Union

Every campus has a team of elected student officers who will be working hard all year from organising parties to running campaigns and you have plenty of chances to get involved

Plus here at Cornwall College your voice is louder than ever all classes have an elected representative who gets to feedback straight to the President and the local site teams The Studentsrsquo Union is one of the best things about Cornwall College and you have the power to determine what itrsquos doing There is something for everyone so donrsquot hesitate to join in httpswwwcornwallstudentsorg

45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College

HE Careers and Employability

There is a new HE Careers and Employability section on Moodle accessible via the Learner Resources tab

UCAS Applications for Teacher Training open on 27th October

Encourage your HE students to access HE Careers Advice

Here is a link to the Plymouth University Careers amp Employability site which includes the Events Calendar

httpwwwpluprospectsacukcasaservletcasajobseekereventJSEventServletmode=showEvampevent_id=SUBOPLU-07072015-EVNT-35658ampsource=casajobseekereventJSEventServlet3Fmode3DshowCal26month3DAll26eventType3DO26seriesStr3Dampstack=null3Anull

9 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University

As a Plymouth University student you will also be able to access the Plymouth University Careers and Employability Service which can provide a wealth of guidance and support resources

5 Employment Opportunities Whilst studying this programme you will be given the opportunity to develop further personal and employability related skills through planned module content and also external opportunities A range of teaching approaches are used to specifically enable you to develop and enhance your communication and team working skills Employers and other industry professionals also input into the programme giving you further contacts

6 Teaching Learning and AssessmentIn a full time Foundation Degree all your work in the first year (Stage 1) will be at level 4 The modules in the second year (Stage 2) of a full time course will be at level 5 If you progress to an honours degree this is HE level 6

HE Level 4

Successful work at Level 4 will show sound knowledge of the underlying concepts and principles of the subjects that you have studied and you will have learned how to take different approaches to solving problems You will be able show that you can communicate accurately in written and spoken language appropriate to the work in hand and the audience You will have the demonstrated the qualities needed for employment requiring the exercise of some personal responsibility

You will in addition be able to show that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems and be able to present evaluate and interpret material including numerical data in order to develop lines of argument and make sound judgements in accordance with basic theories and concepts the subjects that you have studied

HE Level 5

Successful work at level 5 will show that you can apply the knowledge understanding and skills that your course has given you more widely so that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in some unpredictable situations You will be able to show the qualities necessary for employment in situations requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making and that you can perform effectively in your chosen field

You will be able to demonstrate knowledge and critical understanding of the well-established principles of the subjects you have studied and of the way in which those principles have developed You will be able to apply your knowledge understanding and skills outside the context in which they were first studied including in an employment context You will also be able to show that you can apply the main methods of enquiry in the subjects studied and evaluate critically the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in the field of study In particular you will be able to show that you have an understanding of the limits of your knowledge and how this can influence your thoughts and decisions Your standard of communication in all the accepted forms related to your course will be good and you will be able to communicate well to a variety of audiences You will be able to undertake further training develop existing skills and acquire new competences so that you can assume significant responsibility within organisations You will be able to show that you have qualities and transferable skills necessary for employment requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making

10 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Your performance in a module will be assessed during the academic year normally through a combination of coursework and end of year examinations You must pass the assessments in order to be credited with that module for your award In addition some modules may have to be passed as pre-requisites for others taken later in your programme

The method of assessment varies between modules and your lecturers will advise you of the method(s) to be used This reflects the need to develop a range of different knowledge understanding and skills During your programme you may experience some or all of the following types of assessment

Coursework essay questions

Coursework group reports Coursework case study problems Group presentations Small group assessed discussions Practicalrsquos Formal examinations In-class tests Online assessments Portfolios Research project

In all cases these are chosen and designed to assess your achievement of the particular learning outcomes for the module You will be given Assessment Criteria which are used to judge the extent of your achievement

Please note that ALL assessment marks and results are provisional until confirmed by the Subject Assessment Panel and verified by the Award Assessment Board If you do well enough ie you average a mark of over 70 over all your modules at the end of your programme then you will qualify for the award of a First Class Degree You should note marks of 70 and over are awarded for outstanding work only

Please reference the Benchmarking Skills Map within the Programme Specification for further details on how the teaching learning and assessments are achieved within each module

61 Referencing Guides

Look at the Learning Resource Centre page on the student portal for the most up to date guide and citethemrightonlinecom

httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationregulationsplagiarism

Academic offences and academic dishonesty including plagiarism are treated very seriously in the University and in the College and the Universityrsquos academic dishonesty process will be invoked A student who is proven to have committed an academic offence may be placing his or her degree in jeopardy It is your responsibility as a student to make sure that you understand what constitutes an academic offence and in particular what plagiarism is and how to avoid it You should note that when you submit coursework assessments using the specified front cover you will be expected to confirm by signature that you have read and understood the University of Plymouthrsquos policy on plagiarism

62 Exam Procedures

11 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

All students registered at the University are automatically a member of UPSU You can register on our website wwwupsucom to get all the latest information about offers activities gigs campaigns and contact information for your current CollegeInstitution Reps and full-time Executive Officers The website is where we run our elections so partner students can get involved too You can vote online to make your choice and help make changes to your Union Please feel free to get involved with all aspects of UPSU life whether that be campaigning for change becoming a course rep coming along for a night out volunteering with our volunteering department playing in one of our sports teams using our advice centre or writing for our student newspaper

The main contacts for the SU are the Vice President Outreach and the Outreach Co-ordinator The role of the Vice President Outreach involves representing Partner CollegeInstitution Students by visiting meeting and communicating with partner collegeInstitution students and representatives as well as attending strategic boards and committees to champion the Student Voice To get in touch with the Vice President Outreach please contact vpoutreachupsucom The Outreach Coordinator is responsible for providing a link between partner collegeInstitution students and UPSU and promoting opportunities for involvement If you would like to get in touch please contact partnershipstudentsupsucom or wwwupsucomoffcampus More information on UPSU is available at httpwwwupsucomsocieties There are many clubs and societies you may wish to join please follow the URL to find out more

44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)CCSU exists to represent your voice at every level in the College and to make sure you have a fantastic time whilst you are a student with us Whether you are studying A-Levels gaining a Foundation Degree or working towards a BTEC National Diploma - you are a member of the Studentsrsquo Union

Every campus has a team of elected student officers who will be working hard all year from organising parties to running campaigns and you have plenty of chances to get involved

Plus here at Cornwall College your voice is louder than ever all classes have an elected representative who gets to feedback straight to the President and the local site teams The Studentsrsquo Union is one of the best things about Cornwall College and you have the power to determine what itrsquos doing There is something for everyone so donrsquot hesitate to join in httpswwwcornwallstudentsorg

45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College

HE Careers and Employability

There is a new HE Careers and Employability section on Moodle accessible via the Learner Resources tab

UCAS Applications for Teacher Training open on 27th October

Encourage your HE students to access HE Careers Advice

Here is a link to the Plymouth University Careers amp Employability site which includes the Events Calendar

httpwwwpluprospectsacukcasaservletcasajobseekereventJSEventServletmode=showEvampevent_id=SUBOPLU-07072015-EVNT-35658ampsource=casajobseekereventJSEventServlet3Fmode3DshowCal26month3DAll26eventType3DO26seriesStr3Dampstack=null3Anull

9 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University

As a Plymouth University student you will also be able to access the Plymouth University Careers and Employability Service which can provide a wealth of guidance and support resources

5 Employment Opportunities Whilst studying this programme you will be given the opportunity to develop further personal and employability related skills through planned module content and also external opportunities A range of teaching approaches are used to specifically enable you to develop and enhance your communication and team working skills Employers and other industry professionals also input into the programme giving you further contacts

6 Teaching Learning and AssessmentIn a full time Foundation Degree all your work in the first year (Stage 1) will be at level 4 The modules in the second year (Stage 2) of a full time course will be at level 5 If you progress to an honours degree this is HE level 6

HE Level 4

Successful work at Level 4 will show sound knowledge of the underlying concepts and principles of the subjects that you have studied and you will have learned how to take different approaches to solving problems You will be able show that you can communicate accurately in written and spoken language appropriate to the work in hand and the audience You will have the demonstrated the qualities needed for employment requiring the exercise of some personal responsibility

You will in addition be able to show that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems and be able to present evaluate and interpret material including numerical data in order to develop lines of argument and make sound judgements in accordance with basic theories and concepts the subjects that you have studied

HE Level 5

Successful work at level 5 will show that you can apply the knowledge understanding and skills that your course has given you more widely so that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in some unpredictable situations You will be able to show the qualities necessary for employment in situations requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making and that you can perform effectively in your chosen field

You will be able to demonstrate knowledge and critical understanding of the well-established principles of the subjects you have studied and of the way in which those principles have developed You will be able to apply your knowledge understanding and skills outside the context in which they were first studied including in an employment context You will also be able to show that you can apply the main methods of enquiry in the subjects studied and evaluate critically the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in the field of study In particular you will be able to show that you have an understanding of the limits of your knowledge and how this can influence your thoughts and decisions Your standard of communication in all the accepted forms related to your course will be good and you will be able to communicate well to a variety of audiences You will be able to undertake further training develop existing skills and acquire new competences so that you can assume significant responsibility within organisations You will be able to show that you have qualities and transferable skills necessary for employment requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making

10 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Your performance in a module will be assessed during the academic year normally through a combination of coursework and end of year examinations You must pass the assessments in order to be credited with that module for your award In addition some modules may have to be passed as pre-requisites for others taken later in your programme

The method of assessment varies between modules and your lecturers will advise you of the method(s) to be used This reflects the need to develop a range of different knowledge understanding and skills During your programme you may experience some or all of the following types of assessment

Coursework essay questions

Coursework group reports Coursework case study problems Group presentations Small group assessed discussions Practicalrsquos Formal examinations In-class tests Online assessments Portfolios Research project

In all cases these are chosen and designed to assess your achievement of the particular learning outcomes for the module You will be given Assessment Criteria which are used to judge the extent of your achievement

Please note that ALL assessment marks and results are provisional until confirmed by the Subject Assessment Panel and verified by the Award Assessment Board If you do well enough ie you average a mark of over 70 over all your modules at the end of your programme then you will qualify for the award of a First Class Degree You should note marks of 70 and over are awarded for outstanding work only

Please reference the Benchmarking Skills Map within the Programme Specification for further details on how the teaching learning and assessments are achieved within each module

61 Referencing Guides

Look at the Learning Resource Centre page on the student portal for the most up to date guide and citethemrightonlinecom

httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationregulationsplagiarism

Academic offences and academic dishonesty including plagiarism are treated very seriously in the University and in the College and the Universityrsquos academic dishonesty process will be invoked A student who is proven to have committed an academic offence may be placing his or her degree in jeopardy It is your responsibility as a student to make sure that you understand what constitutes an academic offence and in particular what plagiarism is and how to avoid it You should note that when you submit coursework assessments using the specified front cover you will be expected to confirm by signature that you have read and understood the University of Plymouthrsquos policy on plagiarism

62 Exam Procedures

11 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University

As a Plymouth University student you will also be able to access the Plymouth University Careers and Employability Service which can provide a wealth of guidance and support resources

5 Employment Opportunities Whilst studying this programme you will be given the opportunity to develop further personal and employability related skills through planned module content and also external opportunities A range of teaching approaches are used to specifically enable you to develop and enhance your communication and team working skills Employers and other industry professionals also input into the programme giving you further contacts

6 Teaching Learning and AssessmentIn a full time Foundation Degree all your work in the first year (Stage 1) will be at level 4 The modules in the second year (Stage 2) of a full time course will be at level 5 If you progress to an honours degree this is HE level 6

HE Level 4

Successful work at Level 4 will show sound knowledge of the underlying concepts and principles of the subjects that you have studied and you will have learned how to take different approaches to solving problems You will be able show that you can communicate accurately in written and spoken language appropriate to the work in hand and the audience You will have the demonstrated the qualities needed for employment requiring the exercise of some personal responsibility

You will in addition be able to show that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems and be able to present evaluate and interpret material including numerical data in order to develop lines of argument and make sound judgements in accordance with basic theories and concepts the subjects that you have studied

HE Level 5

Successful work at level 5 will show that you can apply the knowledge understanding and skills that your course has given you more widely so that you can evaluate the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in some unpredictable situations You will be able to show the qualities necessary for employment in situations requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making and that you can perform effectively in your chosen field

You will be able to demonstrate knowledge and critical understanding of the well-established principles of the subjects you have studied and of the way in which those principles have developed You will be able to apply your knowledge understanding and skills outside the context in which they were first studied including in an employment context You will also be able to show that you can apply the main methods of enquiry in the subjects studied and evaluate critically the appropriateness of different approaches to solving problems in the field of study In particular you will be able to show that you have an understanding of the limits of your knowledge and how this can influence your thoughts and decisions Your standard of communication in all the accepted forms related to your course will be good and you will be able to communicate well to a variety of audiences You will be able to undertake further training develop existing skills and acquire new competences so that you can assume significant responsibility within organisations You will be able to show that you have qualities and transferable skills necessary for employment requiring the exercise of personal responsibility and decision-making

10 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Your performance in a module will be assessed during the academic year normally through a combination of coursework and end of year examinations You must pass the assessments in order to be credited with that module for your award In addition some modules may have to be passed as pre-requisites for others taken later in your programme

The method of assessment varies between modules and your lecturers will advise you of the method(s) to be used This reflects the need to develop a range of different knowledge understanding and skills During your programme you may experience some or all of the following types of assessment

Coursework essay questions

Coursework group reports Coursework case study problems Group presentations Small group assessed discussions Practicalrsquos Formal examinations In-class tests Online assessments Portfolios Research project

In all cases these are chosen and designed to assess your achievement of the particular learning outcomes for the module You will be given Assessment Criteria which are used to judge the extent of your achievement

Please note that ALL assessment marks and results are provisional until confirmed by the Subject Assessment Panel and verified by the Award Assessment Board If you do well enough ie you average a mark of over 70 over all your modules at the end of your programme then you will qualify for the award of a First Class Degree You should note marks of 70 and over are awarded for outstanding work only

Please reference the Benchmarking Skills Map within the Programme Specification for further details on how the teaching learning and assessments are achieved within each module

61 Referencing Guides

Look at the Learning Resource Centre page on the student portal for the most up to date guide and citethemrightonlinecom

httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationregulationsplagiarism

Academic offences and academic dishonesty including plagiarism are treated very seriously in the University and in the College and the Universityrsquos academic dishonesty process will be invoked A student who is proven to have committed an academic offence may be placing his or her degree in jeopardy It is your responsibility as a student to make sure that you understand what constitutes an academic offence and in particular what plagiarism is and how to avoid it You should note that when you submit coursework assessments using the specified front cover you will be expected to confirm by signature that you have read and understood the University of Plymouthrsquos policy on plagiarism

62 Exam Procedures

11 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

Your performance in a module will be assessed during the academic year normally through a combination of coursework and end of year examinations You must pass the assessments in order to be credited with that module for your award In addition some modules may have to be passed as pre-requisites for others taken later in your programme

The method of assessment varies between modules and your lecturers will advise you of the method(s) to be used This reflects the need to develop a range of different knowledge understanding and skills During your programme you may experience some or all of the following types of assessment

Coursework essay questions

Coursework group reports Coursework case study problems Group presentations Small group assessed discussions Practicalrsquos Formal examinations In-class tests Online assessments Portfolios Research project

In all cases these are chosen and designed to assess your achievement of the particular learning outcomes for the module You will be given Assessment Criteria which are used to judge the extent of your achievement

Please note that ALL assessment marks and results are provisional until confirmed by the Subject Assessment Panel and verified by the Award Assessment Board If you do well enough ie you average a mark of over 70 over all your modules at the end of your programme then you will qualify for the award of a First Class Degree You should note marks of 70 and over are awarded for outstanding work only

Please reference the Benchmarking Skills Map within the Programme Specification for further details on how the teaching learning and assessments are achieved within each module

61 Referencing Guides

Look at the Learning Resource Centre page on the student portal for the most up to date guide and citethemrightonlinecom

httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationregulationsplagiarism

Academic offences and academic dishonesty including plagiarism are treated very seriously in the University and in the College and the Universityrsquos academic dishonesty process will be invoked A student who is proven to have committed an academic offence may be placing his or her degree in jeopardy It is your responsibility as a student to make sure that you understand what constitutes an academic offence and in particular what plagiarism is and how to avoid it You should note that when you submit coursework assessments using the specified front cover you will be expected to confirm by signature that you have read and understood the University of Plymouthrsquos policy on plagiarism

62 Exam Procedures

11 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

For essential help and information about exams follow this link httpswwwplymouthacukstudent-lifeyour-studiesessential-informationexamshelp-and-support-for-exams

7 Assessment Schedules and FeedbackEach Programme has a designated Moodle page which houses further details of each of the modules contained with a programme A full assessment schedule will be available via Moodle Any changes made to the schedule will be done in consultation with the student body and will be fully communicated to the students that are affected We have now moved to an electronic submission system All of your assignments and project work will be submitted through Moodle and will be marked anonymously Once it has been marked your work and feedback will be returned to you through Moodle

71 External Examiner ArrangementsEach programme has an External Examiner who comes from a Higher Education Institution in the UK (not Plymouth University) The Subject External Examiner is primarily concerned with the standards of assessment of the subject and therefore attends the subject assessment panel They will verify the process of assessment throughout your modules advise upon re-assessment (in your teaching learning and assessment handbook) Your final result is decided by an Examination Board which happens in JuneJuly followed by resit boards in September

You can find your External Examiner reports online through the Plymouth student portal under the tabs lsquoYour Learning Your External Examinerrsquo

12 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

Examination Coursework Practical

MODULE CODE Examination Test Coursework Type Coursework Type Coursework Type Practical Type Practical Type

Level 6

CORC329 Research Methods Examination 50 Test 20 Research Plan 30

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

Examination 50 Assignment 50

ERM303 Project Honours Project 100

Students select 2 of the following modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime Test 40 Report 60

CORC331 Environmental Investigation

Test 40 Report 60

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

Test 40 Coursework 60

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing

Test 40 Coursework 60

13 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18) V2

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

Mar

king

stag

eIn

tern

al m

oder

ation

st

age

Exte

rnal

mod

erati

on

stag

eSu

bjec

t Ass

essm

ent

Pane

l (SA

P)

1The sample for the internal moderation comprises 20 or 10 assessment pieces minimum The sample should include a range of assessment pieces including borderlines and fails For more guidance see the Plymouth University Marking and Moderation policy 2015

14 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Student submits work sits test sits examination

Work collated amp passed toModule Leader

Work is marked by Module Leader

Marks collated by Module Leader amp submitted to Programme Manager

Internal moderation sample selected1

Moderation by second academic

Unconfirmed mark amp feedback back to students within 20 working daysStudents receive initial

UNCONFIRMED mark

External moderation samples selected and moderated by External Examiners

Marks approved by SAP and forwarded to College Award Assessment Board

Marks submitted to SAP for consideration and approval

CONFIRMED marks issued to students

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

8 Student Feedback81 Student Representation and Enhancement

Student representation for each stage of the programme is made through programme committee membership which should also reflect on enhancement activities and their impact and sustainability Furthermore programme committee meetings are not considered quorate without student representation

Information for students on the importance of course representation has been developed in partnership with the students along with the course representation cycle Other useful resources are available within the UPSU partner college pages

In addition to student presence through programme committee membership it is noted that students also have representation though the Student Unions of both institutions

82 Student Perception SurveysThe National Student Survey (NSS) and Plymouth Universityrsquos Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) offer the opportunity for the Student Voice to be gathered from students individually Additionally there may be local methods for collating survey feedback on individual modules

Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and National Student Survey (NSS)

All students on Plymouth University courses in partner colleges are given the opportunity to complete a questionnaire (SPQ) between January and March in the first year of their programmes The questionnaire is arranged under a range of headings the answers to which give us student views on how effectively we support their learning experience these include teaching assessment and feedback academic support learning resources personal development opportunities Student responses are used only in statistical form to produce a subject level report and to enable comparative data to be prepared at faculty level

In addition students are asked to participate in the National Student Survey (NSS) at the end of their programme Both of these provide valuable information to enable staff to improve programmes and the learning experience

What is the Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) and what is it for

to give students the chance to tell us what they feel about their experience of teaching and learning at the Cornwall College

to allow us to identify those issues that are perceived by students as affecting their education either positively or negatively

to provide us with a University-wide perspective and to enable staff to prioritise our actions to improve the quality of the educational experience at Cornwall College

What does the survey achieve

At subject level you can expect the findings of the SPQ to be discussed at staff-student liaison groups and Programme Committee Meetings within the college A related Action Plan is prepared to address students concerns and this is in turn linked to the Universityrsquos Quality Assurance process addressed through formal meetings between the University and the college The Director of Higher

15 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

Education (HE) will review the questionnaire results with senior managers and programme teams as appropriate

What is the National Student Survey (NSS) and what does it mean to me

This national survey is designed to provide information on how universities support the student learning experience It provides vital information to prospective students and their advisers to help them make an informed choice on what they want to study and where they should study it The results are shown on the national Unistats website (wwwunistatsacuk)

The survey is an important tool both at national level and within the University ndash it is seeking to capture an overall view of the student experience and the results reflect upon the standing and esteem in which the University is held it is not the tool to use to offer feedback on local course issues which should be directed as normal through course representatives tutors lecturers and the Students Union The Universityrsquos own institutional student perception questionnaire will not be issued to students involved in the national survey to avoid burdening students with too many questionnaires We will therefore rely heavily on the NSS to secure feedback about the overall student experience

The survey is carried out by Ipsos MORI an independent company It will take the form of a short online questionnaire that should only take around 5 minutes to complete All eligible final year students will be contacted and invited to complete the survey So that Ipsos MORI can carry out the survey the University has been asked to provide contact details for students from its current records (this includes all contact details held by the University including personal phone numbers) The personal data will not be used for any other purpose than the survey and will not be passed on to any other partiescompanies All the answers will be kept confidential with results being published in subject groupings

83 Closing the Feedback Loop This includes programme committee feedback through the student representatives as well as other methods for feeding back on the Student Voice

For information please see httpwww1plymouthacukstudentvoicePagesYou-said-we-didaspx)

Cornwall College has developed a student engagement framework which documents the student involvement into quality mechanisms and ensures that feedback on student concerns is delivered in a constructive way and can be demonstrated within the programme action plan On some campus sites student representatives are governors or on the management committee and feedback through Student Representatives meetings

84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)PCMs exist to enable the core programme team and student representatives to meet formally to strict agendas twice per year These meetings are in addition to hosting the ALPrsquos and the EErsquos visits although they may be arranged to align These meetings are held twice per academic year autumn and spring The meeting utilises the standard Plymouth University agenda for each relevant meeting It is vital that Student Representatives from each academic year of the programme attend the meeting It is chaired by the Programme Manager with attendance from module leaders learning centre staff and HE Operations

16 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

85 Complaints

The College wants to ensure that its courses and its case of students are of a high quality However sometimes things may go wrong and you may want to complain If this becomes the case then please follow the link below for further details

httpswwwcornwallacukabout-uscomplaints-procedure

If after reviewing the procedure you are unsure of what action you would like to take or require further advice and guidance then please use the following

E-mail complaintscornwallacuk

86 Extenuating Circumstances

Extenuating Circumstances is a policy to ensure that no student is disadvantaged by circumstances beyond their control whilst maintaining academic standards These are circumstances which

bull affect your ability to attend or complete assessment(s) bull are exceptional bull are outside your control bull can be corroborated by independent evidence bull occurred during or shortly before the assessment in question

If your participation in an examination or assessment has been affected by an extenuating circumstance then you can ask the College to take this info consideration You can submit a claim for extenuating circumstances to cover last submission of work no-submission of work or non-attendance at a time specific assessment such as an examination test presentation or performance or a field class

When making a claim students must ensure that they submit the FULLY completed Extenuating Circumstances form along with the relevant associated evidence as soon as possible and normally no later than ten working days after the deadline for the submission of the work or the date of the presentation performance or test If you are making an extenuating circumstances claim about coursework do not wait for a decision on your claim before submitting your work Please submit the final version of your work within 10 working days of the original deadline However it would be preferred if the claim was submitted within 5 days in order that it can be dealt with quickly and within the timeframe

For full details of the Extenuating Circumstances Policy please follow the link below

httpswwwplymouthacukuploadsproductiondocumentpath66017160121_Extenuating_Circumstances_Policy_and_Proceduresdocx

If you have any queries regarding the submission of the Extenuating Circumstances please speak with your Programme Manager or a member of the HE Operations Team

17 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

9 Appendix 91 Programme Specification

18 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

PROGRAMME SPECIFICATION1

Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)

Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College

State Date 2017-18

First Award Date 2018

Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document

This programme specification template aligns with recommendations within the UK Quality Code for Higher Education2 The information provided by the programme proposer in each section is definitively agreed between the delivering institution and Plymouth University at approval Therefore any requests for changes to content (post the conditions set at approval) must follow Plymouth Universityrsquos procedures for making changes to partnership programmes3

ContentsPS1Programme Details18

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme18

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)19

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations19

PS5 Programme Aims19

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)19

PS7 Distinctive Features20

PS8 Student Numbers20

PS9 Progression Route(s)20

PS10 Admissions Criteria21

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement21

PS12 Programme Structure23

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment24

PS14 Work Based Related Learning281 This Programme Specification contains no information pertaining andor referring to any individual and is therefore appropriate for dissemination as a public document2QAA 2011 Chapter A3 The Programme Level UK Quality Code for Higher Education httpwwwqaaacukenPublicationsDocumentsquality-code-A3pdf last accessed 28 th July 2014 [nb this includes lsquoAppendix 2 Working with programme specifications A leaflet for further education collegesrsquo]3 If required please contact Academic Partnerships Programme Administration for assistance

19 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

Appendix29

20 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

PS1 Programme Details

Awarding Institution Plymouth UniversityPartner Institution and delivery site (s) Cornwall CollegeAccrediting Body NALanguage of Study EnglishMode of Study Full time (1 year)Final Award BSc(Hons)Intermediate Award NAProgramme Title Environmental Resource Management (Top up)UCAS Code F9N2JACS Code D447Benchmarks Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

(FHEQ) Degree Qualification Benchmark (FDQB) ES3

Date of Programme Approval September 1999

PS2 Brief Description of the Programme

This course is designed as a standalone third year top-up to full BSc Honours and is for anyone over 18 who has a keen interest in environmental science conservation or habitat management and who wishes to develop a strong base of scientific and transferable knowledge and skills in a degree studies context It is designed for those who have completed a foundation degree or higher national diploma in a relevant subject Many are available at Cornwall College

You will have the opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection or economic sustainability You will also benefit from the opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwalls unique environment develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management You will find Cornwall College Camborne is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

You will be able to take advantage of the Colleges well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable future

21 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)

NA

PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations(Note Plymouth Universityrsquos Academic Regulations are available internally on the intranet httpsstaffplymouthacukextexamacademicregsintranethtm)

None

PS5 Programme Aims

This programme will deliver

A1 knowledge and understanding - Be informative challenging and to provide the students with a broad scientific knowledge and skills base suitable for a future career in environmental management

A2 cognitive and intellectual- Engender in students a lifelong interest in and enthusiasm for environmental protection and economic sustainability

A3 key transferable skills- Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

A4 employability and CPDlifelong learning - Produce students who are autonomous learners equipped to cope with a working environment

A5 practical skills-Develop in students the ability to critically think about assess and evaluate environmental issues and their legal frameworks

PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)

By the end of this programme the student will be able to

ILO1 knowledge and understanding ndash Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to the business world

ILO2 cognitive and intellectual skills ndash Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

22 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

ILO3 transferable skills ndash be able to communicate time manage project manage work in teams critically evaluate scientific literature and apply methods used in environmental assessment and management

ILO4 employment ndash ie reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

ILO5 practical ndash employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

PS7 Distinctive FeaturesThis text is definitively approved at programme approval and therefore may be directly used for promotion of the programme without the need for further confirmation

The opportunity to carry out an individual research project in an area of environmental management ecology energy management renewable energy environmental protection andor economic sustainability

The opportunity to gain fieldwork experience in Cornwallrsquos unique environment

Cornwall College (Camborne) is located in an area of significant urban regeneration and is also in an area that provides many examples of important environmental management issues

The opportunity to develop knowledge of environmental legislation and environmental management

The college has well established links with individuals and organisations involved in environmental management and with creating a sustainable energy future

PS8 Student Numbers

The following provides information that should be considered nominal and therefore not absolutely rigid but is of value to guide assurance of the quality of the student experience functional issues around enabling progression opportunities to occur and staffing and resource planning

Minimum student numbers per stage = 4

Target student numbers per stage = 20

Maximum student numbers per stage = 40

PS9 Progression Route(s)

Na ndash Level 6 qualification

23 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

PS10 Admissions Criteria

Qualification(s) Required for Entry to this Programme Details

APEL APCL4 possibilities Please refer to University of Plymouth Academic Regulations (wwwplymouthacuk)

Interview Portfolio requirements All students will normally be required to attend an interview

Independent Safeguarding Agency (ISA) Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) clearance required

No

PS11 Academic Standards and Quality EnhancementThe Programme LeaderManager (or the descriptor) leads the Programme Committee in the Plymouth Universityrsquos annual programme monitoring process (APM) as titled at the time of approval APM culminates in the production maintenance and employment of a programme level Action Plan which evidences appropriate management of the programme in terms of quality and standards Any formally agreed changes to this process will continue to be followed by the Programme LeaderManager (or other descriptor) and their Programme Committee

Elements of this process include engaging with stakeholders For this definitive document it is important to define

Subject External Examiner(s)

An Interim visit by External Examiner (EE) (usually between January and February) will review work that has been marked consult students and feed back to the programme manager and module leaders and course team

Subject Assessment Panel (SAP) reviews the assessment marking and is scrutinised by the subject EE Representatives of the team review and present their module marks for each student on the programme

The annual Award Assessment Board (AAB) takes place with Programme Manager the awarding bodyrsquos partnership member and the External to receive the students work and confer progression or award

All modules are covered by a single EE

Additional stakeholders specific to this programme

Students have the opportunity to discuss the programme independently twice a year in the Student Review This forms part of the discussion for the annual programme monitoring in the autumn and spring of each academic year

4 Accredited Prior Experiential Learning and Accredited Prior Certificated Learning

24 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

The Student Perception Questionnaire (SPQ) is administered during the year and feeds into the programme review

Students Representatives attend Annual Programme Monitoring (APM) to contribute student views alongside Module Leaders the Programme Manager and the Assistant Registrar to monitor module delivery and the course provision

Curriculum meetings take place once a month to review progression department provision resources and staffing

25 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

PS12 Programme Structure

The following structure diagram(s) provides the current structure for this programme

FHEQ level 6 For Full Time

FT Route YearWhen in Year (ie Autumn

Spring etc)

Core or Option Module Credits Module

Year 1 All Core 20 CORC329 - Research MethodsYear 1 All Core 20 EIA35 - Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact AssessmentYear 1 All Core 40 ERM303 - Project

Students will select two of the following optional modulesYear 1 All Option 20 CORC330 - Wildlife CrimeYear 1 All Option 20 CORC331 - Environmental InvestigationYear 1 All Option 20 CORC332 - Environmental Sustainability and EconomicsYear 1 All Option 20 CORC333 - Environmental Strategy and Marketing

26 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment

Developing graduate attributed and skills at any level of HE is dependent on the clarity of strategies and methods for identifying the attributes and skills relevant to the programme and where and how these are operationalised The interrelated factors of Teaching Learning and Assessment and how these are inclusive in nature are fundamentally significant to these strategies and methods as are where and how these are specifically distributed within the programme

Ordered by graduate attributes and skills the following table provides a map of the above plus an exposition to describe and explain the ideas and strategy of each Therefore subsequent to the initial completion for approval maintenance of this table as and when programme structure changes occur is also important

FHEQ level 6

Definitions of Graduate Attributes and Skills Relevant to this Programme

Teaching and Learning Strategy Methods Prog Aims

Prog intended Learning Outcomes

Range of Assessments Related Core Modules

Knowledge Understanding

ES3 Section 32 Appendix 2c

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold pass

a systematic understanding of applied environmental science and appropriate legislation including acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge at least some of which is at or informed

Primary Lectures and tutorials Directed independent study Individual research projectsSecondarySupplementary Case studies Problem-solving exercises

1 2 3

3 4 5

Apply knowledge and understanding of environmental issues and legislation to

Key knowledge and understanding is assessed via a combination of examinations in-class tests essaysreports an extended research project

EIA35 CORC331 CORC330CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 ERM303

27 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

by the forefront of defined aspects of a discipline

an ability to deploy accurately established techniques of analysis and enquiry within a discipline

an appreciation of uncertainty ambiguity and the limits of knowledge

the ability to apply the methods and techniques that they have learned to review consolidate extend and apply their knowledge and understanding and to initiate and carry out projects

4

3 4 5

the business world

CORC329

ERM303 CORC331

An explanation for embedding Knowledge and Understanding through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply knowledge and understanding developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentCognitive and Intellectual Skills

ES3 section 334

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passProblem solving and research skillsThe ability to synthesise and summarise information criticallyRecognising the legal and economic issues relating to environmental managementRecognising and using subject specific theories concepts and principles relating to environmental issues

Primary Class exercises and discussionsFeedback via coursework assessment process (essays etcSecondarySupplementary Visiting speakers Fieldtrips

34542 3 4

4

Assimilate interpret and employ information from a wide range of sources and who have the ability to communicate clearly concisely and persuasively

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

CORC329CORC329 ERM303EIA35 CORC332 CORC333

CORC329 EIA35 CORC331 CORC2

An explanation for embedding Cognitive and Intellectual Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programme

28 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

Learners will have demonstrated an ability to apply cognitive and intellectual skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessment

Key Transferable Skills

The ES3 skill setBy the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passThe ability to manage their own learning and to make use of scholarly reviews and primary sources (eg refereed research articles andor original materials appropriate to the discipline)

Communicating appropriately in a written verbal and graphical forms

Numeracyquantitative skills

Primary Library and other research exercisesGroup work and class discussionsProject workLaboratory and field investigations

SecondarySupplementaryClass and seminar interactions and feedback

1 3 5

33 4

Develop students who have a sound academic knowledge and understanding of the applicability of this knowledge to the workplace

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

CORC329 ERM303

All modulesCORC329

An explanation for embedding Key Transferable Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of vocationally based assessmentEmployment Related SkillsES3

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passqualities and transferable skills necessary foremployment requiring- the exercise of initiative and personal responsibility- decision making in complex and unpredictable contexts and- the learning ability needed to undertake appropriate further training of a professional or

Primary NoneSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Reflect evaluate own experiences plan position identify own development showing initiative and self-sufficiency when working autonomously

Assessed presentationsEssaysprojectsdissertationsExaminationstestsCoursework

All modules

29 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

equivalent nature

An explanation for embedding Employment Related Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessmentsPractical Skills

The ES3 skill sets

By the end of this level of this programme the students will be able to demonstrate for a threshold passPlanning conducting and reporting on investigations including the use of secondary dataCollecting recording and analysing data using appropriate techniques in the field and laboratoryUndertaking field and laboratory investigations in a safe and responsible manner paying due attention to risk assessment and health and safety regulations and sensitivity to the impact of investigations on the environment and stakeholdersReferencing work in an appropriate manner

Primary

Laboratory and fieldwork Projects LecturesSecondarySupplementaryNone

1 2 3 4 5 Employ apply specific practical skills critical and analytical skills

Coursework of all typesExamination preparation and completion

ERM303CORC329CORC331

An explanation for embedding Practical Skills through Teaching amp Learning and Assessment at this level of the programmeLearners will have demonstrated an ability to apply practical skills developed within the course to industry related scenarios and will be required to complete a range of practical based skills assessments

30 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

PS14 Work Based Related Learning

FHEQ level 6WBLWRL Activity Logistics Prog Aim Prog Intended LO Range of Assessments Related Core Module(s)Site visits talks from employers development of applied environmental science skills (EIAGIS)

These activities take place as part of the formal lecture schedule

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ILO1 3 4 Assignment Essay ExamCORC330 CORC331 CORC332 CORC333 EIA35

An explanation of this mapThe core aims of the programme are to prepare students for employment Many of the modules develop specific skills relevant to the environmental sector along with generic transferrable skills relevant to all forms of employment

31 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

Appendix

Module Records

32 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC329 MODULE TITLE Research Methods

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE X210

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module equips students with the skills required to complete an Honours project through a program of lectures on research design methodologies literature reviews referencing ldquowriting-uprdquo data analysis and critical thought processes

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 30 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 20

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement

MODULE AIMSThe module aims to develop studentsrsquo ability to plan and execute a research to a standard acceptable for an Honours programme It also aims to develop the ability to produce a synthesis of information and ideas in a sustained discourse constructed around one particular theme

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan and research a project2 Analyse and interpret data3 Construct and shape a convincing argument4 Critically analyse existing literature5 Demonstrate flexibility in using and integrating knowledge as a means of elucidating a particular

theme

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

33 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTImportance and relevance of research Research methodologies Research design Literature reviews and referencing Interpreting the literature Data analysis ndash quantitative and qualitative Report writing

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 Data analysis and experimental design

100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Research Plan 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies CouncilFowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open UniversitySutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University PressHussey J Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London Arnold

34 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE ERM303 MODULE TITLE Project

CREDITS 40 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE N

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module requires students to undertake an honours research project

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 100 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo plan and carry out an honours research project

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Plan a research project and work autonomously2 Identify and critically review relevant literature3 Develop and justify appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data4 Present results appropriately and effectively5 Critically analyse methodology and results6 Identify improvements to methodology7 Identify scope for further work

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

35 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Angus Jackson OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTProject planning ndash objectives actions resources timetable Literature search and review Application of appropriate techniques to gather and analyse data Presentation of results in an appropriate format and in a seminar situation Critical evaluation of methodology results and scope for further work

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationProject Supervision 225Guided Independent study 3775

Total 400 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

CourseworkC1C2

Project reportSeminar

8515

Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byMichael Hunt

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesChalmers N and Parker P (1989) The OU Project Guide Field Studies Council ISBN 1-85153-809-9Fowler J and Cohen L (1990) Practical Statistics for Field Biology The Open University ISBN 0-335-09207-1Sutherland W J (1996) Ecological Census Techniques Cambridge University Press ISBN 0-521-47815-4Hussey J amp Hussey R (1997) Business Research A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students London MacmillanGreenfield T (1997) Research Methods Guidance for Post Graduates London ArnoldLucey T (1992) Quantitative Techniques 4th Ed London DPPStrauss A L amp Corbin J (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques Newbury Park California Sage

36 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE EIA35 MODULE TITLE Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F846

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)An introduction to Geographical Information Systems in the context of Environmental Impact Assessment and environmental decision making

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) 50 C1 (Coursework) 50 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test)

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSThis module develops an understanding of the nature application and practice of Geographical Information systems as applied to Environmental Impact Assessment and their role in environmental decision making

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the EIA process and demonstrate understanding of the EIA legislation2 Describe the methodologies used for impact identification and prediction3 Understand the nature types and application of GIS4 Understand the value and limitations of GIS and the information generated5 Use GIS to display create analyse and communicate information

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

37 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTNature types and applications of GIS assessing a GIs package the navigating the GIS environment and GIS features Creating a new GIS project map scales and projections distance and area data displays customising inputting information digitising Outputting analysing and communicating information The purpose origins development principles and practice of EIA Stages in the EIA procedures EIA directive and UK requirements Methods for impact identification and prediction Local case studies application of GIS to one major study

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 90Guided Independent Study 110

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E1 Examination 100Total = 100

T_ Total = 100

Coursework C1 Assignment 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date280816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date280816

Recommended Texts and SourcesGlasson J Therivel R and Chadwick A (1999) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment 2nd Edition UCL Press ISBN 1-85728-945-5Petts J (1999) Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Volume One amp volume two Blackwell Science ISBN 0-632-04772-0 ISBN 0-632-04771-2Treweek J (1999) Ecological Impact Assessment Blackwell Scientific ISBN 0-632-03738-5Chrisman N (1997) Exploring Geographical Information Systems Wiley ChichesterDeMers MN (1997) Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems Wiley ChichesterJones CB (1997) Geographical Information Systems and Computer Cartography Ad Wes Land High EdHeywood I Cornelius S Carver S (2002) An Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

38 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

(2nd Edn) Pearson Education Ltd HarlowLangley (1999) Geographical Information Systems (Version 2 Second Edition) John Wiley IncRodriguez-Bachiller A (2000) Geographical Information Systems and Expert Systems for Impact Assessment Part 1 GIS Journal of Environmental Assessment Policy and Management Vol 2 No 3 pp 369 ndash 414

39 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC330 MODULE TITLE Wildlife Crime

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F490

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module allows the student to develop an understanding of wildlife crime and the application of forensic techniques to investigations of such crime

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo inform the students about the legislation protecting wildlife the nature and extent of wildlife crime and the forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Describe the nature and extent of wildlife crime2 Identify and interpret legislation relating to wildlife crime3 Describe and appraise the roles of the different organisations involved in regulating wildlife

crime4 Understand and apply the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife

crime

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

40 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER John Blackburn OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTDemonstrate by means of a written report knowledge and understanding of the wildlife crime and its regulationDemonstrate by means of written examination knowledge of the different forensic techniques used in the investigation of wildlife crime

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional support outside of taught sessions

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO2

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 3 and 4

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byK Haynes

Date 290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (as amended at Bonn 1979)DEFRA (2004) Wildlife Crime A guide to the forensic and specialist techniques in the investigation of wildlife crimeHunter M L (1996) Fundamentals of Conservation Biology Blackwell ScienceLowther J Cook D Roberts M (2002) Crime and punishment in the wildlife trade A WWFTRAFFIC report

41 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC331 MODULE TITLE Environmental Investigation

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTORThis module allows the student to demonstrate an understanding of the methods and organisations involved in environmental investigations

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMSTo allow the student to develop the skills to investigate and assess environmental issues or incidents with scientific rigor

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMESAt the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate the ability to make assessments of environmental pollutiondamage using a range

of techniques2 Demonstrate understanding of environmental legislation3 Show an understanding of the need for professional standards and ethical behaviour4 Demonstrate the ability work independently and reflect on their performance5 Demonstrate an understanding of health and safety issues in the working environment

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 November 2007 FACULTYOFFICE Academic Partnerships

DATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 September 2008

SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall College

DATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

42 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Michael Hunt OTHER MODULE STAFF

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTChemical analysis Biological assessment Air pollution Contaminated land Marine pollution Environmental law Carbon auditing and carbon management strategies Professional Practice

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 39Fieldwork 3External Visits 3Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated by B Forest Date 290916

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290916

Recommended Texts and SourcesClark R B (1997) Marine Pollution (4th Ed) Oxford University Press Oxford ISBN 0 19 850069 6httpwwwdefragovukenvironmentbusinessreportinghttpwwwdefragovukenvironmentairqualitystrategyMason C F (1996) The biology of freshwater pollution LongmanMurphy B L and Morrison R D (2007) Introduction to Environmental Forensics 2nd Edition Academic PressNational Environment Technology Centre (Netcen) website httpwwwairqualitycoukarchiveindexphp

43 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC332 MODULE TITLE Environmental Sustainability and Economics

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 6 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters) This module introduces the student to the impact and use of economic policies and theories on the environment It shows how the use of models and ideas from the field of economics can assist in resolving environmental problems It builds on an understanding of economic theory to consider the use of a range of environmental problems and the possible solutions which the science of economics can offer

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirement NA

MODULE AIMS To provide students with an understanding of the relevance and possible drawbacks to the use of economic ideas to provide a perspective in understanding environmental issues and resolving environmental problems

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Demonstrate knowledge of economic principles and understand how they relate to

environmental issues2 Have an awareness of the ethical issues which affect economic decisions in the environment

including such issues as the valuation of intangibles3 Assess a range of data and information using a range of sources within journals and government

and other official publications4 Evaluate the relevance of economic ideas to particular areas of policy and compare them to

other possible publications5 Use information selectively and with minimum guidance to produce a competent study of an

issue in environmental economics6 Show how economic principles can be applied to the resolution of environmental problems

using appropriate tools and knowledge

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

44 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Warren Evans OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTIntroduction to economic principles market economics market failure environmental sustainability cost-benefit analysis tradable permits pollution taxes and congestion charges

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 45Guided Independent Study 155

Total 200 (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E_ Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

Coursework C1 Written Report 100Total = 100

Practical P_ Total = 100

Updated byDave Ager

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin

Date290816

Recommended Texts and Sources

45 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION A DEFINITIVE MODULE RECORD Proposed changes must be submitted via Faculty Quality Procedures for approval and issue of new module code

MODULE CODE CORC333 MODULE TITLE Environmental Strategy and Marketing

CREDITS 20 FHEQ Level 4 JACS CODE F750

PRE-REQUISITES None CO-REQUISITES None COMPENSATABLE Y

SHORT MODULE DESCRIPTOR (max 425 characters)This module enables students to devise and evaluate strategic plans and policies as they apply to projects organisations and agencies involved with environmental issues

ELEMENTS OF ASSESSMENT Use HESA KIS definitions]WRITTEN EXAMINATION COURSEWORK PRACTICAL

E1 (Examination) C1 (Coursework) 60 P1 (Practical) or PassFail (delete as appropriate)

E2 (Clinical Examination)

A1 (Generic Assessment)

T1 (Test) 40

SUBJECT ASSESSMENT PANEL Group to which module should be linked Camborne

Professional body minimum pass mark requirementNA

MODULE AIMSStudents will explore the contrasting demands of business and the environment adopting appropriate strategic planning models and critically appraising alternatives They will be expected to make objective judgements and build a strategic plan through the application of sound business and environmental management techniques

ASSESSED LEARNING OUTCOMES (additional guidance below)At the end of the module the learner will be expected to be able to1 Identify and evaluate alternative environmental performance criteria2 Critically evaluate the strategic policies and plans of an organisationproject against justified

environmental criteria3 Develop an understanding of market research processes to inform the strategic planning

process4 Devise an outline strategic plan based on this analysis and construct this in a way that confirms

to sound business practice without compromising the environmental objectives5 Create a marketing framework for communicating policyplans to a potentially mixed andor

hostile audience in an effective way

DATE OF APPROVAL 01 May 1999 FACULTYOFFICE Academic PartnershipsDATE OF IMPLEMENTATION 01 Sept 1999 SCHOOLPARTNER Cornwall CollegeDATE(S) OF APPROVED CHANGE 010913 TERMSEMESTER All Year

Additional notes (for office use only)

46 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

SECTION B DETAILS OF TEACHING LEARNING AND ASSESSMENTItems in this section must be considered annually and amended as appropriate in conjunction with the Module Review Process Some parts of this page may be used in the KIS return and published on the extranet as a guide for prospective students Further details for current students should be provided in module guidance notesACADEMIC YEAR 2017-2018 NATIONAL COST CENTRE 111

MODULE LEADER Yvonne Oates OTHER MODULE STAFF None

SUMMARY of MODULE CONTENTObjective setting and stakeholder analysis Environmental scanning SWOT analysis and assessing strategic capability Environmental project value chain analysis Strategic options and decision criteria in an environmentally sensitive climate ndash with particular reference to potential conflict between economics wealth generation and notions of sustainability Market research and market planning Environmental planning and strategy in a global context

SUMMARY OF TEACHING AND LEARNING [Use HESA KIS definitions]Scheduled Activities Hours CommentsAdditional InformationLecture 40 Core material deliveryTutorial 5 Additional one-to-one support

Guided Independent Study 155 Students are expected to put in additional time outside of taught sessions

Total (NB 1 credit = 10 hours or learning 10 credits = 100 hours etc)

Cate

gory

Elem

ent

Com

pone

nt

Nam

e

Com

pone

nt

Wei

ghtin

g

Com

men

ts

incl

ude

links

to

lear

ning

ob

jecti

ves

Written exam

E Total = 100

T1 In Class Test 100Total = 100

To cover LO 1 and 2

Coursework C1 Coursework 100Total = 100

To cover LO 3 4 and 5

Practical P Total = 100

Updated byBruce Forest

Date290816

Approved byMathew Tonkin (HE Operations)

Date290816

Recommended Texts and SourcesSchaltegger S Burritt R and Petersen H (2003) An Introduction to Corporate Environmental ManagementCharter M and Polonsky J (1999) Greener Marketing Greenleaf Publishing SheffieldPiasecki B Fletcher K and Mendelson F (1999) Environmental Management and Business Strategy John Wiley New YorkWelford R and Gouldson A (1993) Environmental Management and Business Strategy Financial TimesPitman Publishing LondonCrosbie L and Knight K (1995) Strategy for Sustainable Business McGraw Hill LondonOttman J (1998) Green Marketing Opportunity for Innovation NTC Chicago

47 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330

Boatright J (2000) Ethics And The Conduct Of Business (3rd Edition) Prentice Hall LondonClegg S Kornberger M and Pitsis T (2005) Managing and Organizations Sage LondonJohnson G and Scholes K (2002) Exploring Corporate Strategy FTPrentice Hall HarlowBusiness Strategy and the Environment (bi-monthly journal) John Wiley Chichesterhttpwwwenvironmental-expertcommagazinewiley0964-4733

Stage 3

Module Code Module Title No of Credits

Core Optional

CORC329 Research Methods 20 Core

ERM303 Project 40 Core

EIA35 Geographical Information Systems and Environmental Impact Assessment

20 Core

Students will select two of the following optional modules

CORC330 Wildlife Crime 20 Optional

CORC331 Environmental Investigation 20 Optional

CORC332 Environmental Sustainability and Economics

20 Optional

CORC333 Environmental Strategy and Marketing 20 Optional

48 | P a g eBSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up) Handbook (2017-18)

  • 1 Welcome and Introduction to BSc (Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
  • 2 Programme Team
  • 3 Personal Tutor
    • 31 Plymouth Portal
      • 4 Programme Details
        • 41 Enhancement Activities
        • 42 Progression through the programme
        • 43 Plymouth University Student Union
        • 44 Cornwall College Student Union (CCSU)
        • 45 HE Careers Guidance ndash Cornwall College
        • 46 HE Careers Guidance ndash Plymouth University
          • 5 Employment Opportunities
          • 6 Teaching Learning and Assessment
            • 61 Referencing Guides
            • 62 Exam Procedures
              • 7 Assessment Schedules and Feedback
                • 71 External Examiner Arrangements
                  • 8 Student Feedback
                    • 81 Student Representation and Enhancement
                    • 82 Student Perception Surveys
                    • 83 Closing the Feedback Loop
                    • 84 Programme Committee Meetings (PCM)
                    • 85 Complaints
                    • 86 Extenuating Circumstances
                      • 9 Appendix
                        • 91 Programme Specification
                          • Programme Title BSc(Hons) Environmental Resource Management (Top up)
                          • Partner Delivering Institution Cornwall College
                          • State Date 2017-18
                          • First Award Date 2018
                          • Date(s) of Revision(s) to this Document
                          • PS1 Programme Details
                          • PS2 Brief Description of the Programme
                          • PS3 Details of Accreditation by a ProfessionalStatutory Body (if appropriate)
                          • PS4 Exceptions to Plymouth University Regulations
                          • PS5 Programme Aims
                          • PS6 Programme Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO)
                          • PS7 Distinctive Features
                          • PS8 Student Numbers
                          • PS9 Progression Route(s)
                          • PS10 Admissions Criteria
                          • PS11 Academic Standards and Quality Enhancement
                          • PS12 Programme Structure
                          • PS13 Explanation and Mapping of Learning Outcomes Teaching amp Learning and Assessment
                          • PS14 Work Based Related Learning
                          • Appendix
                            • CORC330